Panasonic PT-D12000U Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions
3-chip DLP®-based Projector
Commercial Use
Models No.
PT-D12000U
PT-DZ12000U
Read these instructions completely before operating this unit.
TQBJ 0263-1
Dear Panasonic Customer:
This instruction booklet provides all the necessary operating information that you might require. We hope it will
help you to get the most performance out of your new product, and that you will be pleased with your Panasonic
®
DLP based projector.
The serial number of your product may be found on an attached label. You should note it in the space provided
below and retain this booklet in case service is required.
Model number: PT-D12000U/PT-DZ12000U
Serial number:
2 – ENGLISH
37
40
45
48
51
54
60
64
69
Display Option settings ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 70
Projector setup ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 77
P IN P ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 85
Displaying the internal test pattern・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 87
Setting the security ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 88
How to use network functions ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 91
Using the PJLink™ protocol ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 105
Using the serial terminals ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 106
Using the Remote 2 terminal ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 110
Monitor Lamp Indicators ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 111
Cleaning and replacement of air filter ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 112
Replacement of lamp unit ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 114
Notes when installing the ceiling mount bracket ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 116
Before asking for service … try to check the following points again. ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 117
Self-diagnosis display ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 118
Specifications ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 120
Appendix・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 122
Dimensions ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 125
Index ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 126
Basic Operation
Projection ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
How to adjust the lens ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
Registration of input signal data ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
Basic operations using the remote control ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
On-screen menus・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
Adjusting the picture ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
Adjusting the position ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
How to use ADVANCED MENU ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
Setting the DISPLAY LANGUAGE ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
Special Features
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・4
Precautions with regard to safety ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・6
Before Using ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 10
Location and function of each part ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 12
Using the remote control unit ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 17
Installation ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 19
Connection・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 27
Installation of (optional) input modules ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 30
How to install and remove the projection lens (optional) ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 36
Getting Started
Be sure to read the “IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE” and
the “Precautions with regard to safety”. (pp. 4-9)
Information
Contents
ENGLISH – 3
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle,
is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the Product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature accompanying the product.
CAUTION:
This equipment is equipped with a three-pin grounding-type power
plug. Do not remove the grounding pin on the power plug. This plug
will only fit a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If
you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician.
Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug.
Do not remove
4 – ENGLISH
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Getting Started
WARNING:
FCC CAUTION: To assure continued compliance, use only shielded interface cables when
connecting to computer or peripheral devices. Any unauthorized changes
or modifications to this equipment could void the user’s authority to
operate.
WARNING:
Not for use in a computer room as defined in the Standard for the
Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment, ANSI/
NFPA 75.
Model Number:
Trade Name:
Responsible Party:
Telephone Number:
Email:
Declaration of Conformity
PT-D12000U/PT-DZ12000U
Panasonic
Panasonic Corporation of North America
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
(888) 411-1996
projectorsupport@us.panasonic.com
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTICE:
This product has a High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamp that contains
mercury. Dispose may be regulated in your community due to environmental
considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your
local authorities, or the Electronic Industries Alliance: http://www.eiae.org
ENGLISH – 5
Precautions with regard to safety
WARNING
„ If a problem occurs (such as no image) or if you notice smoke or
a strange smell coming from the projector, turn off the power and
disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Do not continue to use the projector in such cases, otherwise fire or electric shocks could result.
• Check that no more smoke is coming out, and then contact an Authorized Service Center for repairs.
• Do not attempt to repair the projector yourself, as this can be dangerous.
„ Do not install this projector in a place which is not strong enough to
take the full weight of the projector.
• If the installation location is not strong enough, it may fall down or tip over, and severe injury or
damage could result.
• Installation work (such as ceiling suspension) should only be carried out by a qualified technician.
• If installation is not carried out correctly, there is the danger that injury or electric shocks may occur.
„ If foreign objects or water get inside the projector, or if the projector
is dropped or the cabinet is broken, turn off the power and disconnect
the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Continued use of the projector in this condition may result in fire or electric shocks.
• Contact an Authorized Service Center for repairs.
„ Do not cover the air filter, the air inlet and exhaust vents.
• Doing so may cause the projector to overheat, which can cause fire or damage to the projector.
„ Do not overload the wall outlet.
• If the power supply is overloaded (for example, by using too many adapters), overheating may occur
and fire may result.
„ Do not remove the cover or modify it in any way.
• High voltages which can cause fire or electric shocks are present inside the projector.
• For any inspection, adjustment and repair work, please contact an Authorized Service Center.
„ Clean the power cord plug regularly to prevent it from becoming
covered in dust.
• If dust builds up on the power cord plug, the resulting humidity can damage the insulation, which
could result in fire. Pull the power cord out from the wall outlet and wipe it with a dry cloth.
• If not using the projector for an extended period of time, pull the power cord plug out from the wall
outlet.
„ Do not do anything that might damage the power cord or the power
cord plug.
• Do not damage the power cord, make any modifications to it, place it near any hot objects, bend it
excessively, twist it, pull it, place heavy objects on top of it or wrap it into a bundle.
• If the power cord is used while damaged, electric shocks, short-circuits or fire may result.
• Ask an Authorized Service Center to carry out any repairs to the power cord that might be necessary.
„ Do not handle the power cord plug with wet hands.
• Failure to observe this may result in electric shocks.
„ Insert the power cord plug securely into the wall outlet.
• If the plug is not inserted correctly, electric shocks or overheating could result.
• Do not use plugs which are damaged or wall outlets which are coming loose.
6 – ENGLISH
• If the projector is placed on top of a surface which is sloped or unstable, it may fall down or tip over,
and injury or damage could result.
„ Do not place the projector into water or let it become wet.
• Failure to observe this may result in fire or electric shocks.
„ Do not disassemble the lamp unit.
• If the lamp section breaks, it may cause injury.
„ Do not place liquid containers on top of the projector.
• If water spills onto the projector or gets inside it, fire or electric shocks could result.
• If any water gets inside the projector, contact an Authorized Service Center.
Getting Started
„ Do not place the projector on top of surfaces which are unstable.
„ Do not insert any foreign objects into the projector.
• Do not insert any metal objects or flammable objects into the projector or drop them onto the projector,
as doing so can result in fire or electric shocks.
„ After removing the battery from remote control unit, keep it away from
the reach of children.
• The battery can cause death by suffocation if swallowed.
• If the battery is swallowed, seek medical advice immediately.
„ Do not allow the + and - terminals of the battery to come into contact
with metallic objects such as necklaces or hairpins.
• Failure to observe this may cause the battery to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire.
• Store the battery in a plastic bag and keep it away from metallic objects.
„ Insulate the battery using tape or similar before disposal.
• If the battery comes into contact with metallic objects or other batteries, it may catch fire or explode.
„ Replacement of the lamp unit should be carried out by a qualified
technician.
• The lamp unit has high internal pressure. If improperly handled, failure might result.
• The lamp unit can easily become damaged if struck against hard objects or dropped, and injury or
malfunctions may result.
„ When installing to a ceiling, be sure to use the accessory wire (install
in a different location to the ceiling mount bracket) and the eye bolts
as an extra preventative measure to stop the projector from falling
down.
• If the projector is not secure enough, accidents may result.
„ Do not place sets directly on top of each other.
• If this is not observed, accidents may result.
„ Do not use the projector while the projection lens cover is still
attached to the projection lens (sold separately).
• If this is not observed, fire may occur.
„ Do not look into the lens while the projector is being used.
• Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens. If you look directly into this light, it can hurt and
damage your eyes.
„ Do not place your skin into the light beam while the projector is being
used.
• Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens. If you place directly into this light, it can hurt or
damage your skin.
ENGLISH – 7
Precautions with regard to safety (continued)
CAUTION
„ Do not set up the projector in humid or dusty places or in places
where the projector may come into contact with smoke or steam.
• Using the projector under such conditions may result in fire or electric shocks.
„ When disconnecting the power cord, hold the plug, not the cord.
• If the power cord itself is pulled, the cord will become damaged, and fire, short-circuits or serious
electric shocks may result.
„ Always disconnect all cables before moving the projector.
• Moving the projector with cables still attached can damage the cables, which could cause fire or
electric shocks to occur.
„ Do not place any heavy objects on top of the projector.
• Failure to observe this may cause the projector to become unbalanced and fall, which could result in
damage or injury.
„ Do not short-circuit, heat or disassemble the battery or place it into
water or fire.
• Failure to observe this may cause the battery to overheat, leak, explode or catch fire, and burns or other
injury may result.
„ When inserting the battery, make sure the polarities (+ and -) are
correct.
• If the battery is inserted incorrectly, it may explode or leak, and fire, injury or contamination of the
battery compartment and surrounding area may result.
„ Use only the specified battery.
• If an incorrect battery is used, it may explode or leak, and fire, injury or contamination of the battery
compartment and surrounding area may result close to this port, otherwise burns or damage could
result.
„ Do not bring your hands or other objects close to the air outlet port.
• Heated air comes out of the air outlet port. Do not bring your hands or face, or objects which cannot
withstand heat.
„ Do not use the old lamp unit.
• The lamp section may break.
„ Replacement of the lamp unit should only be carried out after it has
„
completely cooled off, otherwise burns may result.
Disconnect the power cord plug from the wall outlet as a safety
precaution before carrying out any cleaning.
• Electric shocks can result if this is not done.
„ If the lamp has broken, ventilate the room immediately. Do not touch
or bring your face close to the broken pieces.
• Failure to observe this may cause the user to absorb the gas which was released when the lamp broke
and which contains nearly the same amount of mercury as fluorescent lamps, and the broken pieces
may cause injury.
• If you believe that you have absorbed the gas or that the gas has got into your eyes or mouth, seek
medical advice immediately.
• Ask your dealer to replace the lamp unit and check the inside of the projector.
8 – ENGLISH
once a year.
• If dust is left to build up inside the projector without being cleaned out, it can result in fire or problems
with operation.
• It is a good idea to clean the inside of the projector before the season for humid weather arrives. Ask
your nearest Authorized Service Center to clean the projector when required. Please discuss with the
Authorized Service Center regarding cleaning costs.
„ Do not reach for the openings beside the optical lens, during
„
„
horizontal or vertical movements of the lens there is a injury hazard.
An effort to keep our environment clean, please bring the
non-repairable unit to your Dealer or a Recycling Company.
Do not use projectors with the adjustable feet or projection lens cover
removed.
Getting Started
„ Ask an Authorized Service Center to clean inside the projector at least
• If this is not observed, the sets may not operate correctly or accidents may result.
ENGLISH – 9
Before Using
Accessories
Check that all of the accessories shown below have been included with your projector.
Remote Control
[N2QAYB000076 × 1]
Batteries for Remote
Control (AA)
Power cord
For 240 V
[K2CG3YY00035 × 1]
For 120 V
[K2CH3YY00001 × 1]
Drop-prevention bracket
Eye bolt
[TPAHE86 × 4]
Wire
[TTRA0143 × 4]
Caution when moving the projector
The projection lens is susceptible to vibrations and impacts. Be sure to always remove the lens during transport.
Cautions regarding setup
Be sure to observe the following precautions when installing the product.
„ Be sure to install the projection lens cover after installing the projection lens.
If this is not done, dust will collect inside the projector and problems with the projector will result.
„ Avoid installing the product in a place exposed to vibrations or impacts.
If the projector is installed in a place where vibrations are transmitted from a source of driving power and
others or mounted in a car, vibrations or impacts may be transmitted to the product to damage the internal
parts, causing failure. Install the product in a place free from vibrations and impacts.
„ Do not install the projector near high-voltage power lines or power sources.
The product may be exposed to interference if it is installed in the vicinity of high-voltage electrical power
lines or power sources.
„ Do not place the projector on a vinyl sheet or carpet.
If a vinyl sheet sucked up and blocks the air filter intake port, the internal temperature of the projector may
increase, which triggers the protection circuit, turning off the power.
„ Be sure to ask a specialized technician when to install the product to a
ceiling.
If the product is to be installed hanging from the ceiling, purchase an optional hanging attachment (for high
ceiling: Model No. ET-PKD100H) (for low ceiling: Model No. ET-PKD100S) and call a specialized technician for
installation.
„ Do not operate the projector over 2 700 m (8881.5´) above sea level. When
operating between 1 400 m (4605.3´) and 2 700 m (8881.5´) above sea
level, set the “ALTITUDE MODE”, described on page 78, to “ON”.
Otherwise the life of the product may be shortened.
„ When installing and using the projector at an angle that exceeds 30°from
the horizontal in the vertical direction, set “DIRECTION”, described on
page 78, to “VERTICAL”.
10 – ENGLISH
clear images:
„ •ToTheview
audience cannot enjoy high-contrast and clear images if outside light or the illumination interferes the
screen surface. Draw window curtains or blinds, turn off the lightings near the screen or take other proper
measures.
• In rare cases, wafture can occur on the screen affected by the warm air from the exhaust port depending on
the environment. Make sure that there is no equipment in front of the set which will recirculate the exhaust
air from the set or other nearby equipment.
not touch the surface of the projection lens with bare hand.
„ Do
If fingerprints or stains are left on the projection lens surface, they are magnified and projected on the screen.
Keep your hands away from the lens. Cover the lens with the supplied lens cap when the projector is not used.
Getting Started
Notes on use
chips
„ DLP
The DLP chips are made using extremely high-precision technology. Note that in rare cases, pixels may be
missing or always lit, but this is not a malfunction.
„ Lamp
A mercury lamp with high internal pressure is used for the light source of this product. A high-pressure
mercury lamp has the following characteristics:
• It may burst with a loud sound or end its life cycle by not illuminating because of given impacts, flaws, or
deterioration due to used hours.
• The life cycle of a mercury lamp varies according to the individual difference or conditions of use. In
particular, turning the power on and off frequently and/or repeatedly will greatly affect the life cycle.
• In rare cases, it may burst shortly after projection starts.
• The possibility of explosion increases when the lamp is used beyond the replacement time.
• When the lamp bursts, the gas inside will be emitted and may appear like smoke.
• Provide a lamp for replacement in advance.
„ Maintenance
Be sure to remove the power cord plug from the receptacle before cleaning.
• Use soft and dry cloth to clean the cabinet
Use a soft cloth moistened in warm water to clean away oil. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner,
and alcohol, detergents for kitchens, or a chemical cloth. If using such solvents, the outer case may
become deformed, and the paint may peel off.
• Do not clean the lens surface with fuzzy or dusty cloth.
If dust adheres to the lens, it will be magnified and projected on the screen. Use a soft and clean cloth to
wipe off dust.
Caution:
When connecting the projector to a PC or external device, use the power cord supplied with the corresponding
device and a commercially available shielded interface cable.
Disposal
When disposing of the product, contact your nearest municipality or dealer to confirm the correct procedure for
disposal.
Attention on security
If you use the network function of this product, there is the likelihood of being subjected to the following damage.
• Personal information being leaked via this product
• Unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party
• Interfering or stopping of this product by a malicious third party
Be sure to take sufficient security measures. (pp. 88-94)
• Use a password that is as difficult to guess as possible.
• Change your password regularly.
• Panasonic and its affiliate companies would never directly inquire about your password.
In the event that somebody does make a direct inquiry, do not let the person know your password.
• Use a network for which security measures such as a firewall have been implemented.
• Set a password, and place restrictions on the users who can log in.
ENGLISH – 11
Location and function of each part
Remote control unit
„ Front
1
2
3
l
4
5
m
6
n
7
o
p
8
9
j
q
r
s
k
1 Remote control operation indicator lamp
This LED flashes when any button is pressed. If
it doesn’t, check the side Lock switch and the
batteries.
2 POWER STANDBY button ・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 37, 39)
When the projector is operating, use this key to
enter the Standby mode.
3 POWER ON button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 38)
When the projector is in standby mode with the
MAIN POWER switch of the projector at the
“ l ” side, this button switches the projector to
projection mode.
4 Input select (RGB1, RGB2, DVI-D, VIDEO,
S-VIDEO, AUX) button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 48)
These buttons select the RGB1, RGB2, DVI-D,
VIDEO, S-VIDEO and AUX (optional input module)
input ports.
5 MENU button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 51, 53)
Use this button to return to the previous screen
when the sub menu is displayed. If you hold it
down for at least 3 seconds while the on-screen
indication is OFF, the OFF state is canceled.
6 Arrow ▲▼◄►buttons ・・・・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 53, 88)
Use these buttons to select menu items,
change settings, adjust levels, and to enter the
“SECURITY” password.
12 – ENGLISH
7
8
9
j
k
ENTER button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 53)
Press to activate a menu selection or to initiate a
function.
ON SCREEN button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 48)
This buttons toggles the display of the onscreen
menus.
TEST PATTERN button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 49)
Use this button together with the arrow keys to
display the internal test patterns.
Numeric (0-9) buttons ・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 18, 84)
These buttons are used in systems with multiple
projectors to enter projector ID numbers. They
may also be used to enter user-adjustment values
and by service personnel.
STATUS button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 48)
Press this button to display projector information.
It can also be used to send information about the
projector’s status via E-mail.
LIGHT button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 49)
Press this button to illuminate the remote control
buttons. The backlight will be extinguished
10 seconds after the last key press.
„ Top
Getting Started
„ Side
u
t
„ Bottom
l AUTO SET UP button・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 49)
Pressing this button while projecting an image
automatically corrects the picture positioning
on the screen. While the auto setup feature is
active, a message “PROGRESS...” appears on the
screen.
m SHUTTER button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 48)
Pressing this button toggles the projector’s
internal mechanical shutter to black out the
projected image.
n ASPECT button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 50)
Toggles through the aspect ratio settings
appropriate for the current input signal.
o LENS (FOCUS, ZOOM, SHIFT) button ・・・ (p. 40)
These buttons are used together with the arrow
keys to adjust the projection lens.
p Function 1 (FUNC1) button ・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 49)
This button function can be assigned on the
“FUNC1” line of the “PROJECTOR SETUP” page,
found on the Main Menu page.
q DEFAULT button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 53)
Press this button when you want to restore the
setting of the item selected in the menu to the
factory default value.
r ID SET button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 18, 77)
When two or more main units are used in the
system, this button specifies the ID of the remote
control.
v
s ID ALL button・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 18, 77)
When two or more projectors are used in the
system, this button allows all projectors to
be controlled regardless of their current ID
assignments.
t LOCK button
This switch locks the remote to prevent
unintended operation and to prevent the batteries
from becoming spent during shipment.
u Remote control transmitter window
Operate the remote control aiming at the remote
control receiver window on the main unit.
v Remote control wired terminal ・・・・・・・・・ (p. 18)
To use the wired output terminal, connect the
remote control and the main unit with the cable
(sold separately).
Note
• The AUX input select button is enabled only when
an optional input module is installed.
ENGLISH – 13
Location and function of each part (continued)
Projector Main Unit
„ Front
„ Rear
1 2
7
8 9 j
3 45 6
k
l m
1 Projection lens cover・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 36)
2 Projection lens (optional)
Lens for projecting images on the screen.
3 Remote control receiver window (front)
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 17)
This window receives the signal beam emitted
from the remote control.
4 LAMP (LAMP1, LAMP2, LAMP3, LAMP4)
monitor ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 111)
These LEDS indicate the status of each lamp GREEN for “In Use”, RED for “End-of-Life”, and
BLINKING RED for “Error Condition”.
5 Temperature monitor (TEMP) ・・・・・・・・・ (p. 111)
These LEDs illuminate and flash to indicate lamp
warmup intervals, abnormal internal temperatures,
or cooling fan errors.
6 Power indicator lamp ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 37)
The lamp lights in red when the MAIN POWER
switch is turned to “ l ”. It turns to green when the
POWER ON button of the remote control or the
main unit is pressed.
7 Air intake vents
During installation, ensure adequate airflow to
these vents.
8 Burglar hook
Attach a commercial burglar prevention cable to
this hook port.
9 Adjustable feet ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 20)
Use these feet to adjust the tilt of the projector.
(Adjustable feet are provided at the front and rear,
right and left.)
14 – ENGLISH
n
p
q
o
r
s
j Projection lens cover lock button ・・・・・・ (p. 36)
Press these side buttons to unlock the lens
cowling, pulling it forward to remove. Centering
the lens first may ease removal.
k Air filter ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 112)
l Air filter cleaning monitor・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 81, 112)
This blinks blue while the air filter is being cleaned.
It lights red when there is a problem with the air
filter.
m Filter cleaning unit fixing screw ・・・・・・・ (p. 112)
This is used to secure the air filter cover.
n Air exhaust vents
During installation do not allow these vents to
become blocked.
o Lamp unit cover screw ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 115)
This is used to secure the lamp unit cover.
p Remote control receiver window (rear) ・ (p. 17)
This also receives the signal beam coming from
the remote control.
q Remote control receiver window (bottom)
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 17)
This also receives the signal beam coming from
the remote control.
r Air intake vents
During installation, ensure adequate airflow to
these vents.
s Lamp unit cover ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 115)
This hinged panel swings down for lamp
replacement.
„ Controls
Connection
terminals (p. 16)
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
Controls
3
1 AC IN terminal ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 37)
Connect the supplied line power cord into this
receptacle.
Do not connect any other cable to this socket.
2 MAIN POWER switch・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 37-39)
Use this switch to turn on “I” and off “○” the
commercial line power applied to the projector.
3 Slot cover ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 31)
Install the optional input modules here.
4 POWER ON ( I ) button ・・・・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 37, 38)
When the projector is in standby mode with the
MAIN POWER switch of the projector at the
“ l ” side, this button switches the projector to
projection mode.
5 POWER STANDBY ( ) button ・・・・・・ (pp. 37, 39)
When the projector is in use, pressing this button
twice puts the projector into the Standby mode.
6 MENU button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 51, 53)
Use this button to return to the previous screen
when the sub menu is displayed. If you hold it
down for at least 3 seconds while the on-screen
indication is OFF, the OFF state is canceled.
7 Arrow ▲▼◄► buttons ・・・・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 53, 88)
Use these buttons to select menu items,
change settings, adjust levels, and to enter the
“SECURITY” password.
j
k
l
m
Getting Started
„ Side
n
8 LENS button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 40)
Toggles through the lens Zoom, Focus, and Shift
(H & V) adjustment modes.
9 ENTER button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 53)
Press to activate a menu selection or to initiate a
function.
j Input select (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, RGB1, RGB2,
DVI-D, AUX) button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 48)
Used to select the VIDEO, S-VIDEO, RGB1, RGB2,
DVI-D and AUX (optional input module) input
ports.
k AUTO SETUP button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 49)
Pressing this button while projecting an image
automatically corrects the picture positioning
on the screen. While the auto setup feature is
active, a message “PROGRESS...” appears on the
screen.
l Self-diagnosis display ・・・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 118-119)
m LIGHT ON/OFF button
This switch is used for illuminating the connection
terminals and controls.
n SHUTTER button ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 48)
Pressing this button toggles the projector’s
internal mechanical shutter to black out the
projected image.
Note
• The AUX input select button is enabled only when
an optional input module is installed.
ENGLISH – 15
Location and function of each part (continued)
„ Connection terminals
1
7 8
2
3
9
1 REMOTE1 lN/OUT terminal ・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 18)
When two or more main units are used in the
system, they can be connected and controlled
with a wired remote control cable (M3 jack).
2 REMOTE2 IN terminal ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 110)
The user can remotely control the main unit by
using an external control circuit to this terminal
(D-SUB 9-pin female).
3 SERIAL IN terminal・・・・ (pp. 28-29, 80, 106-109)
RS-232C compliant input terminal (switching
necessary) to connect a PC and to externally
control the main unit (D-SUB 9-pin female).
4 SERIAL IN terminal・・・・ (pp. 28-29, 80, 106-109)
RS-422 compliant input terminal (switching
necessary) to connect a PC and to externally
control the main unit (D-SUB 9-pin female).
5 SERIAL OUT terminal ・・・・・・・・(pp. 29, 106-109)
RS-422 compliant output terminal (switching
necessary) to loop through signals from the Serial
Input terminals (D-SUB 9-pin male).
16 – ENGLISH
4
j
k
5
6
l
6 LAN terminal (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 28-29, 93)
The projector can be connected to a network and
controlled through it’s onboard web page.
7 VIDEO IN terminal・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 28)
An input terminal for video signals. (BNC)
8 VIDEO OUT terminal ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 28)
An output terminal (active through) for video
signals. (BNC)
9 S-VIDEO IN terminal ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 28)
An input terminal for S-video signals (Mini DIN
4-pin). This terminal complies with S1 signals
and automatically toggles between 16:9 and 4:3
according to the size of input signals.
j RGB (YPBPR) 1 IN terminal ・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 28, 29)
A terminal to input RGB or YPBPR signals (3, 4 or
5-wire BNC).
k RGB2 IN terminal ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (p. 29)
A terminal to input RGB or YPBPR signals (D-SUB
15-pin female).
l DVI-D IN terminal ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ (pp. 28, 29)
An input terminal for single-link DVI-D signals.
Loading batteries
When loading supplied AA batteries into the battery
compartment of the Remote Control, make sure that
their polarities are correct.
1. Open battery compartment lid.
• Open the lid in the order 1 and then 2.
$
#
2. Insert the batteries.
Effective range of remote
control operation
The Remote Control should normally be aimed at
either the front or rear remote control receiver window
on the projector (figure 1).
The effective control range is approx. 30 metres from
the beam receiver on the front or rear.
Otherwise, it may also be aimed at the screen, which
will reflect commands back to the projector’s front
receiver window as illustrated in figure 2.
• When the Remote Control is aimed at the screen,
the effective control range may be reduced due to
the optical loss by screen reflection.
Figure 1
• Top View
(Front)
• Into battery compartment, with their
polarities orientated as indicated (⊕,⊖) in the
compartment.
Supplied AA batteries
(insert the ⊖ side first).
Getting Started
Using the remote control unit
(Rear)
30°
30°
Remote
Control
30°
30°
Remote
Control
• Side View
Remote
Control
30°
3. Close the battery compartment
lid.
• Replace the battery compartment lid over the
compartment and slide until it clicks.
30°
15°
Remote
Control
15°
15°
15°
30°
30°
Remote
Control
Remote
Control
Figure 2
Attention
•
•
•
•
Do not drop the Remote Control unit.
Do not expose Remote Control unit to any liquid.
Do not use NiCd batteries.
Release the LOCK button before operating the
remote control. (p. 13)
Screen
Remote
Control
Projector
Remote Control
receiver window
(front)
Remote Control
receiver
window (rear)
ENGLISH – 17
Using the remote control unit (continued)
Note
• The Remote Control may not function properly if
line-of-site operation is blocked.
• The Remote Control receiver may not function
properly in intense ambient light such as fluorescent
lamps. Carefully site the projector so its Remote
Control receiver windows will not be directly
exposed to intense light.
Setting projector ID
number to remote control
Using a wired remote
control
When multiple projectors are connected as part of
the system, connect to units with a M3 stereo mini
jack cable (sold separately) to simultaneously control
multiple main units with a single remote control
through the REMOTE1 IN/OUT terminal. It is effective
to use the wired remote control in the environment in
which an obstacle stands in the light path or where
devices are susceptible to outside light.
Connect to the secondary projector
Each projector can be assigned a unique ID number,
and the handheld remote’s number must be set to
match the intended projector. (p. 77) The ID number
of the projector is set to “ALL” on shipping, and
use the ID ALL button of the remote control when
using only a single projector.
1. Press ID SET, and the
projector(s) will display it’s
current ID number onscreen.
Within 5 seconds, use the
numeric keys (0-9) to match the
Remote’s ID number with that of
the desired projector.
Connection terminals
M3 stereo mini pin-PIN cable
(sold separately)
Attention
• Do not press the ID SET button accidentally or
carelessly because the ID number on the Remote
Control can be set even when no projector is
around.
• If you do not enter the two-digit ID number within
5 seconds after the ID SET button has been
pressed, the ID number will remain at the number
that was set before the ID SET button was pressed.
• Your specified ID number is stored in the remote
control unit unless another one is specified later.
However, the stored ID will be erased if the batteries
of the remote control are left exhausted. When the
batteries are replaced, set the same ID number
again.
• The ID number can be set to “ALL” or from “1” to
“64”.
18 – ENGLISH
Remote Control
Attention
• Use a two-wire shielded cable with a length of 15 m
or less. If the length of the cable exceeds 15 m, the
shielding of the cable may not be sufficient and the
remote control may not work.
Examples of system expansion
The projector is provided with a number of terminals and optional accessories to enable various system
expansions.
The following are some examples of system expansion:
System 1
The optional high- or low-ceiling mount brackets enable flexible installation.
Getting Started
Installation
System 2
Connection to a computer via the DVI-D IN terminal or DVI-D input module
(optional).
System 3
Built-in keystone and geometric correction can compensate for offset projector
mounting and curved screens.
Panasonic
ENGLISH – 19
Installation (continued)
Adjusting the feet
The four adjustable feet (p. 14) mounted at the bottom of the projector are level-adjustable (0 mm–15 mm) which
can be used when the mounting surface is uneven.
(Front)
(Rear)
Projection scheme
All four combinations of Front, Rear, Ceiling or Floor mounting are available. Use the INSTALLATION menu to
choose the desired projection scheme. (p. 78)
Installation geometry
When planning the projector and screen geometry, refer to the figures below and the information on the next page
for reference. After the projector is roughly positioned, picture size and vertical picture positioning can be finely
adjusted with the powered zoom lens and lens shifting mechanism.
z When attaching an optional ceiling mount bracket (ET-PKD100H)
254
(10˝)
66
(2.6˝)
L
(4.7˝)
314
(12.4˝)
L
SH
(unit : mm/inch)
200
(7.9˝)
120
580.5 - 700.5
H
Top View
(22.9˝ - 27.6˝)
(unit : mm/inch)
SW
Side View
L1
175
(6.9˝)
L
H
Screen
254
(10˝)
Screen
L
Projection distance
SH
Height of the image
SW Image width
H
Vertical distance between the lens center level and
the bottom edge of the projected image
* For PT-D12000U:
H = 0 to SH
For PT-DZ12000U:
H = -0.1 × SH to 1.1 × SH
* However, if the ET-D75LE5 has been installed,
the value will be fixed at H=SH/2 for both the
PT-D12000U and PT-DZ12000U. If the ET-D75LE6
has been installed, the values will be H = 0.1 × SH
to 0.9 × SH for the PT-D12000U, and H = 0 to SH
for the PT-DZ12000U.
20 – ENGLISH
Lens
Lens Protrusion L1
(Approx.)
ET-D75LE1
62.5 (2.5˝)
ET-D75LE2
47 (1.9˝)
ET-D75LE3
50.5 (2˝)
ET-D75LE4
74.4 (2.9˝)
ET-D75LE5
150.5 (5.9˝)
ET-D75LE6
160 (6.3˝)
ET-D75LE8
202.5 (8˝)
z Projected range using geometric adjustment
HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE
Top View
α
β
Screen
Screen
VERTICAL ARC
Side View
HORIZONTAL ARC
Top View
L2
L2
L2 : Projection distance
R2 : Radius of the circle
L2 : Projection distance
R2 : Radius of the circle
Screen
Screen
R2
R2
Side View
Top View
L3
L3
Center of the
circle
Center of the
circle
Screen
R3
Screen
L3 : Projection distance
R3 : Radius of the circle
Keystone correction only
Lens
ET-D75LE1
Getting Started
VERTICAL KEYSTONE
Side View
L3 : Projection distance
R3 : Radius of the circle
R3
When using arc and keystone correction together
Arc correction only
Vertical
Keystone
Correction
Angle α( °)
Horizontal
Keystone
Correction
Angle β( °)
Vertical
Keystone
Correction
Angle α( °)
Horizontal
Keystone
Correction
Angle β( °)
R2/L2
minimum
value
R3/L3
minimum
value
R2/L2
minimum
value
R3/L3
minimum
value
±40
±15
±5
±5
1.6
3.2
0.8
1.6
ET-D75LE2
±40
±15
±5
±5
1.2
2.4
0.6
1.2
ET-D75LE3
±40
±15
±10
±10
0.8
1.6
0.4
0.8
ET-D75LE4
±40
±15
±10
±15
0.6
1.0
0.3
0.5
ET-D75LE5
±22
±15
±5
±5
3.0
6.0
1.5
3.0
ET-D75LE6
±28
±10
±5
±5
2.4
4.8
1.2
2.4
ET-D75LE8
±40
±15
±10
±15
0.4
0.8
0.2
0.4
Note
• When using geometric adjustment, if the amount of compensation is too great, excessive blurring may result.
• The curved screens illustrated are simply sections of a full circle.
ENGLISH – 21
Installation (continued)
Projection distances by the type of projection lenses
(optional)
The available lenses have been designed with different projector-distance to screen-width ratios (“throw ratios”).
Select the appropriate lens model for your projection distance and screen size. Consult the following tables and
Panasonics’s online Lens Calculator.
Side View
Screen
SH
Top View
Screen
SW
L : Projection distance
SH : Effective screen height
SW : Effective screen width
L
Note
• The projection distances listed here involve an error of ±5 %.
• When using geometric adjustment, alter the compensation so that the screen size becomes smaller than the
specified size.
„ Projection distances by the type of projection lenses (for PT-DZ12000U)
z For the screen aspect ratio of 16:10 (Units: m (feet/inches))
Lens type
Model number of
projection lens
Throw ratio*1
Screen dimensions
ET-D75LE1
ET-D75LE2
1.4-1.8 : 1
1.8-2.8 : 1
Screen Effective Effective
size
height
width
Min.
(inch)
(SH)
(SW)
70
80
90
100
120
150
200
250
300
350
400
500
600
0.942
(3´1˝)
1.077
(3´6˝)
1.212
(3´11˝)
1.346
(4´4˝)
1.615
(5´3˝)
2.019
(6´7˝)
2.692
(8´9˝)
3.365
(11´)
4.039
(13´3˝)
4.712
(15´5˝)
5.385
(17´8˝)
6.731
(22´1˝)
8.077
(26´5˝)
1.508
(4´11˝)
1.723
(5´7˝)
1.939
(6´4˝)
2.154
(7´)
2.585
(8´5˝)
3.231
(10´7˝)
4.308
(14´1˝)
5.385
(17´8˝)
6.462
(21´2˝)
7.539
(24´8˝)
8.616
(28´3˝)
10.770
(35´4˝)
12.923
(42´4˝)
22 – ENGLISH
Fixed-focus
lens
Zoom lens
2.01
(6´7˝)
2.31
(7´6˝)
2.61
(8´6˝)
2.91
(9´6˝)
3.51
(11´6˝)
4.40
(14´5˝)
5.89
(19´3˝)
7.39
(24´2˝)
8.88
(29´1˝)
10.37
(34´)
11.86
(38´10˝)
14.85
(48´8˝)
17.83
(58´5˝)
Max.
ET-D75LE3
ET-D75LE4
ET-D75LE8
2.8-4.6 : 1
4.6-7.4 : 1
7.3-13.8 : 1
Projection distance (L)
Max.
Min.
Min.
2.69
(8´9˝)
3.09
(10´1˝)
3.49
(11´5˝)
3.89
(12´9˝)
4.68
(15´4˝)
5.88
(19´3˝)
7.87
(25´9˝)
9.87
(32´4˝)
11.86
(38´10˝)
13.86
(45´5˝)
15.85
(52´)
19.84
(65´1˝)
23.82
(78´1˝)
2.72
4.10
4.11
(8´11˝)
(13´5˝)
(13´5˝)
3.12
4.70
4.71
(10´2˝)
(15´5˝)
(15´5˝)
3.52
5.30
5.31
(11´6˝)
(17´4˝)
(17´5˝)
3.92
5.90
5.91
(12´10˝) (19´4˝)
(19´4˝)
4.73
7.10
7.11
(15´6˝)
(23´3˝)
(23´3˝)
5.93
8.90
8.91
(19´5˝)
(29´2˝)
(29´2˝)
7.93
11.91
11.92
(26´)
(39´)
(39´1˝)
9.93
14.91
14.92
(32´6˝) (48´11˝) (48´11˝)
11.93
17.91
17.92
(39´1˝)
(58´9˝)
(58´9˝)
13.93
20.91
20.92
(45´8˝)
(68´7˝)
(68´7˝)
15.94
23.92
23.93
(52´3˝)
(78´5˝)
(78´6˝)
19.94
29.92
29.93
(65´5˝)
(98´1˝)
(98´2˝)
23.94
35.93
35.94
(78´6˝) (117´10˝) (117´10˝)
Max.
Min.
Max.
Min.
6.90
(22´7˝)
7.90
(25´11˝)
8.91
(29´2˝)
9.91
(32´6˝)
11.91
(39´)
14.92
(48´11˝)
19.94
(65´5˝)
24.95
(81´10˝)
29.97
(98´3˝)
34.98
(114´9˝)
40.00
(131´2˝)
50.03
(164´1˝)
60.06
(197´)
6.91
11.06
10.78
(22´8˝)
(36´3˝)
(35´4˝)
7.91
12.66
12.37
(25´11˝) (41´6˝)
(40´7˝)
8.91
14.25
13.97
(29´2˝)
(46´9˝) (45´10˝)
9.91
15.85
15.57
(32´6˝)
(52´)
(51´)
11.92
19.04
18.76
(39´1˝)
(62´5˝)
(61´6˝)
14.93
23.82
23.54
(48´11˝) (78´1˝)
(77´2˝)
19.95
31.80
31.52
(65´5˝) (104´3˝) (103´4˝)
24.96
39.77
39.49
(81´10˝) (130´5˝) (129´6˝)
29.98
47.75
47.47
(98´4˝) (156´7˝) (155´8˝)
34.99
55.72
55.44
(114´9˝) (182´9˝) (181´10˝)
40.01
63.70
63.42
(131´3˝) (208´11˝) (208´)
50.04
79.65
79.37
(164´2˝) (261´3˝) (260´4˝)
60.07
95.60
95.32
(197´) (313´7˝) (312´8˝)
Max.
ET-D75LE6
ET-D75LE5
0.9-1.1 : 1
0.7 : 1
Min.
Max.
Fixed
20.56
1.35
(67´5˝)
(4´5˝)
23.55
1.55
(77´3˝)
(5´1˝)
26.54
1.76
(87´)
(5´9˝)
29.53
1.96
(96´10˝)
(6´5˝)
35.50
2.36
(116´5˝)
(7´8˝)
44.47
2.96
(145´10˝) (9´8˝)
59.41
3.97
(194´10˝) (13´)
74.36
4.98
(243´11˝) (16´4˝)
89.30
5.99
(292´11˝) (19´7˝)
104.24
6.99
(341´11˝) (22´11˝)
119.19
8.00
(391´)
(26´2˝)
149.08
10.01
(489´1˝) (32´10˝)
178.96
12.03
(587´1˝) (39´5˝)
1.62
(5´3˝)
1.86
(6´1˝)
2.10
(6´10˝)
2.34
(7´8˝)
2.82
(9´3˝)
3.55
(11´7˝)
4.75
(15´7˝)
5.96
(19´6˝)
7.17
(23´6˝)
8.37
(27´5˝)
9.58
(31´5˝)
11.99
(39´4˝)
14.40
(47´2˝)
0.99 (3´2˝)
1.15 (3´9˝)
1.30 (4´3˝)
1.45 (4´9˝)
1.76 (5´9˝)
2.22 (7´3˝)
2.99 (9´9˝)
3.76 (12´4˝)
4.53 (14´10˝)
Lens type
Model number of
projection lens
Throw ratio*1
Screen dimensions
ET-D75LE1
ET-D75LE2
1.4-1.8 : 1
1.8-2.8 : 1
Screen Effective Effective
size
height
width
Min.
(inch)
(SH)
(SW)
70
80
90
100
120
150
200
250
300
350
400
500
600
0.872
(2´10˝)
0.996
(3´3˝)
1.121
(3´8˝)
1.245
(4´1˝)
1.494
(4´10˝)
1.868
(6´1˝)
2.491
(8´2˝)
3.113
(10´2˝)
3.736
(12´3˝)
4.358
(14´3˝)
4.981
(16´4˝)
6.226
(20´5˝)
7.472
(24´6˝)
1.550
(5´1˝)
1.771
(5´9˝)
1.992
(6´6˝)
2.214
(7´3˝)
2.657
(8´8˝)
3.321
(10´10˝)
4.428
(14´6˝)
5.535
(18´1˝)
6.641
(21´9˝)
7.748
(25´5˝)
8.855
(29´)
11.069
(36´3˝)
13.283
(43´6˝)
Fixed-focus
lens
Zoom lens
2.07
(6´9˝)
2.38
(7´9˝)
2.68
(8´9˝)
2.99
(9´9˝)
3.60
(11´9˝)
4.53
(14´10˝)
6.06
(19´10˝)
7.59
(24´10˝)
9.13
(29´11˝)
10.66
(34´11˝)
12.19
(39´11˝)
15.26
(50´)
18.33
(60´1˝)
Max.
ET-D75LE3
ET-D75LE4
ET-D75LE8
2.8-4.6 : 1
4.6-7.4 : 1
7.3-13.8 : 1
Projection distance (L)
Max.
Min.
Min.
2.77
(9´1˝)
3.18
(10´5˝)
3.59
(11´9˝)
4.00
(13´1˝)
4.82
(15´9˝)
6.05
(19´10˝)
8.10
(26´6˝)
10.15
(33´3˝)
12.19
(39´11˝)
14.24
(46´8˝)
16.29
(53´5˝)
20.39
(66´10˝)
24.49
(80´4˝)
2.80
4.21
4.23
(9´2˝)
(13´9˝) (13´10˝)
3.21
4.83
4.84
(10´6˝) (15´10˝) (15´10˝)
3.62
5.45
5.46
(11´10˝) (17´10˝) (17´10˝)
4.04
6.07
6.08
(13´3˝) (19´10˝) (19´11˝)
4.86
7.30
7.31
(15´11˝) (23´11˝) (23´11˝)
6.09
9.15
9.16
(19´11˝)
(30´)
(30´)
8.15
12.24
12.25
(26´8˝)
(40´1˝)
(40´2˝)
10.21
15.33
15.34
(33´5˝)
(50´3˝)
(50´3˝)
12.27
18.41
18.42
(40´3˝)
(60´4˝)
(60´5˝)
14.32
21.50
21.51
(46´11˝) (70´6˝)
(70´6˝)
16.38
24.58
24.60
(53´8˝)
(80´7˝)
(80´8˝)
20.50
30.76
30.77
(67´3˝) (100´11˝) (100´11˝)
24.61
36.93
36.94
(80´8˝) (121´1˝) (121´2˝)
Max.
Min.
Max.
7.09
7.10
11.37
(23´3˝)
(23´3˝)
(37´3˝)
8.13
8.13
13.01
(26´8˝)
(26´8˝)
(42´8˝)
9.16
9.16
14.65
(30´)
(30´)
(48´)
10.19
10.19
16.29
(33´5˝)
(33´5˝)
(53´5˝)
12.25
12.26
19.57
(40´2˝)
(40´2˝)
(64´2˝)
15.34
15.35
24.49
(50´3˝)
(50´4˝)
(80´4˝)
20.50
20.50
32.69
(67´3˝)
(67´3˝) (107´3˝)
25.65
25.66
40.88
(84´1˝)
(84´2˝) (134´1˝)
30.81
30.81
49.08
(101´)
(101´)
(161´)
35.96
35.97
57.28
(117´11˝) (118´) (187´11˝)
41.12
41.12
65.47
(134´10˝) (134´10˝) (214´9˝)
51.42
51.43
81.87
(168´8˝) (168´8˝) (268´7˝)
61.73
61.74
98.26
(202´6˝) (202´6˝) (322´4˝)
Min.
11.09
(36´4˝)
12.73
(41´9˝)
14.37
(47´1˝)
16.01
(52´6˝)
19.29
(63´3˝)
24.21
(79´5˝)
32.40
(106´3˝)
40.60
(133´2˝)
48.80
(160´1˝)
57.00
(187´)
65.19
(213´10˝)
81.59
(267´8˝)
97.98
(321´5˝)
Max.
ET-D75LE6
ET-D75LE5
0.9-1.1 : 1
0.7 : 1
Min.
Max.
Fixed
21.14
1.39
(69´4˝)
(4´6˝)
24.21
1.60
(79´5˝)
(5´2˝)
27.29
1.81
(89´6˝)
(5´11˝)
30.36
2.01
(99´7˝)
(6´7˝)
36.50
2.43
(119´9˝) (7´11˝)
45.72
3.05
(150´)
(10´)
61.08
4.08
(200´4˝) (13´4˝)
76.44
5.12
(250´9˝) (16´9˝)
91.79
6.15
(301´1˝) (20´2˝)
107.15
7.19
(351´6˝) (23´7˝)
122.51
8.22
(401´11˝) (26´11˝)
153.23
10.29
(502´8˝) (33´9˝)
183.95
12.36
(603´6˝) (40´6˝)
1.66
(5´5˝)
1.91
(6´3˝)
2.16
(7´1˝)
2.41
(7´10˝)
2.90
(9´6˝)
3.65
(11´11˝)
4.89
(16´)
6.13
(20´1˝)
7.37
(24´2˝)
8.61
(28´2˝)
9.85
(32´3˝)
12.33
(40´5˝)
14.81
(48´7˝)
1.02 (3´4˝)
1.18 (3´10˝)
Getting Started
z For the screen aspect ratio of 16:9 (Units: m (feet/inches))
1.34 (4´4˝)
1.50 (4´11˝)
1.81 (5´11˝)
2.29 (7´6˝)
3.08 (10´1˝)
3.87 (12´8˝)
4.66 (15´3˝)
z For the screen aspect ratio of 4:3 (Units: m (feet/inches))
Lens type
Model number of
projection lens
Throw ratio*1
Screen dimensions
ET-D75LE1
ET-D75LE2
1.6-2.2 : 1
2.2-3.3 : 1
Screen Effective Effective
size
height
width
Min.
(inch)
(SH)
(SW)
70
80
90
100
120
150
200
250
300
350
400
500
600
1.067
(3´6˝)
1.219
(3´11˝)
1.372
(4´6˝)
1.524
(5´)
1.829
(6´)
2.286
(7´6˝)
3.048
(10´)
3.810
(12´6˝)
4.572
(15´)
5.334
(17´6˝)
6.096
(20´)
7.620
(25´)
9.144
(30´)
1.422
(4´7˝)
1.626
(5´4˝)
1.829
(6´)
2.032
(6´8˝)
2.438
(7´11˝)
3.048
(10´)
4.064
(13´4˝)
5.080
(16´8˝)
6.096
(20´)
7.112
(23´4˝)
8.128
(26´8˝)
10.160
(33´4˝)
12.192
(40´)
Fixed-focus
lens
Zoom lens
2.29
(7´6˝)
2.63
(8´7˝)
2.96
(9´8˝)
3.30
(10´9˝)
3.98
(13´)
4.99
(16´4˝)
6.68
(21´10˝)
8.37
(27´5˝)
10.06
(33´)
11.75
(38´6˝)
13.44
(44´1˝)
16.82
(55´2˝)
20.20
(66´3˝)
ET-D75LE3
ET-D75LE4
ET-D75LE8
3.3-5.6 : 1
5.6-8.9 : 1
8.8-16.5 : 1
Projection distance (L)
Max.
Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
ET-D75LE6
ET-D75LE5
1.1-1.3 : 1
0.8 : 1
Max.
Min.
Max.
Min.
Min.
Max.
Fixed
3.06
(10´)
3.51
(11´6˝)
3.96
(12´11˝)
4.41
(14´5˝)
5.32
(17´5˝)
6.67
(21´10˝)
8.93
(29´3˝)
11.18
(36´8˝)
13.44
(44´1˝)
15.70
(51´6˝)
17.96
(58´11˝)
22.47
(73´8˝)
26.98
(88´6˝)
3.09
(10´1˝)
3.55
(11´7˝)
4.00
(13´1˝)
4.45
(14´7˝)
5.36
(17´7˝)
6.72
(22´)
8.99
(29´5˝)
11.25
(36´10˝)
13.52
(44´4˝)
15.79
(51´9˝)
18.05
(59´2˝)
22.58
(74´)
27.12
(88´11˝)
4.65
(15´3˝)
5.33
(17´5˝)
6.01
(19´8˝)
6.69
(21´11˝)
8.05
(26´4˝)
10.09
(33´1˝)
13.49
(44´3˝)
16.89
(55´4˝)
20.29
(66´6˝)
23.69
(77´8˝)
27.09
(88´10˝)
33.89
(111´2˝)
40.69
(133´5˝)
4.66
7.83
7.83
12.54
12.25
23.32
1.54
(15´3˝)
(25´8˝)
(25´8˝)
(41´1˝)
(40´2˝)
(76´6˝)
(5´)
5.34
8.96
8.97
14.34
14.06
26.71
1.77
(17´6˝)
(29´4˝)
(29´5˝)
(47´)
(46´1˝)
(87´7˝)
(5´9˝)
6.02
10.10
10.10
16.15
15.87
30.09
2.00
(19´9˝)
(33´1˝)
(33´1˝) (52´11˝)
(52´)
(98´8˝)
(6´6˝)
6.70
11.23
11.24
17.96
17.67
33.47
2.22
(21´11˝) (36´10˝) (36´10˝) (58´11˝) (57´11˝) (109´9˝)
(7´3˝)
8.06
13.50
13.51
21.57
21.28
40.24
2.68
(26´5˝)
(44´3˝)
(44´3˝)
(70´9˝)
(69´9˝)
(132´)
(8´9˝)
10.10
16.91
16.92
26.98
26.70
50.39
3.36
(33´1˝)
(55´5˝)
(55´6˝)
(88´6˝)
(87´7˝) (165´3˝)
(11´)
13.50
22.59
22.59
36.01
35.73
67.31
4.50
(44´3˝)
(74´1˝)
(74´1˝) (118´1˝) (117´2˝) (220´10˝) (14´9˝)
16.90
28.27
28.27
45.04
44.76
84.23
5.64
(55´5˝)
(92´8˝)
(92´8˝) (147´9˝) (146´10˝) (276´4˝) (18´6˝)
20.30
33.94
33.95
54.07
53.79
101.14
6.78
(66´7˝) (111´4˝) (111´4˝) (177´4˝) (176´5˝) (331´9˝) (22´2˝)
23.70
39.62
39.63
63.10
62.82
118.06
7.92
(77´9˝) (129´11˝) (130´)
(207´) (206´1˝) (387´4˝) (25´11˝)
27.10
45.30
45.31
72.13
71.85
134.98
9.06
(88´10˝) (148´7˝) (148´7˝) (236´7˝) (235´8˝) (442´10˝) (29´8˝)
33.90
56.65
56.66
90.18
89.91
168.81
11.34
(111´2˝) (185´10˝) (185´10˝) (295´10˝) (294´11˝) (553´10˝) (37´2˝)
40.70
68.01
68.02
108.24 107.96 202.65
13.62
(133´6˝) (223´1˝) (223´1˝) (355´1˝) (354´2˝) (664´10˝) (44´8˝)
1.84
(6´)
2.11
(6´11˝)
2.38
(7´9˝)
2.66
(8´8˝)
3.20
(10´5˝)
4.02
(13´2˝)
5.39
(17´8˝)
6.76
(22´2˝)
8.12
(26´7˝)
9.49
(31´1˝)
10.85
(35´7˝)
13.58
(44´6˝)
16.32
(53´6˝)
1.13 (3´8˝)
1.31 (4´3˝)
1.48 (4´10˝)
1.66 (5´5˝)
2.00 (6´6˝)
2.53 (8´3˝)
3.40 (11´1˝)
4.27 (14´)
5.14 (16´10˝)
*1: “Throw ratio” is the approximate measurement range of the screen width to the projection distance.
ENGLISH – 23
Installation (continued)
„ Projection distances by the type of projection lenses (for PT-D12000U)
z For the screen aspect ratio of 4:3 (Units: m (feet/inches))
Lens type
Model number of
projection lens
*1
Throw ratio
Screen dimensions
ET-D75LE1
ET-D75LE2
1.5-2.0 : 1
2.0-3.0 : 1
Screen Effective Effective
size
height
width
Min.
(inch)
(SH)
(SW)
70
80
90
100
120
150
200
250
300
350
400
500
600
1.067
(3´6˝)
1.219
(3´11˝)
1.372
(4´6˝)
1.524
(5´)
1.829
(6´)
2.286
(7´6˝)
3.048
(10´)
3.810
(12´6˝)
4.572
(15´)
5.334
(17´6˝)
6.096
(20´)
7.620
(25´)
9.144
(30´)
Fixed-focus
lens
Zoom lens
1.422
(4´7˝)
1.626
(5´4˝)
1.829
(6´)
2.032
(6´8˝)
2.438
(7´11˝)
3.048
(10´)
4.064
(13´4˝)
5.080
(16´8˝)
6.096
(20´)
7.112
(23´4˝)
8.128
(26´8˝)
10.160
(33´4˝)
12.192
(40´)
2.07
(6´9˝)
2.38
(7´9˝)
2.68
(8´9˝)
2.99
(9´9˝)
3.60
(11´9˝)
4.53
(14´10˝)
6.06
(19´10˝)
7.59
(24´10˝)
9.13
(29´11˝)
10.66
(34´11˝)
12.19
(39´11˝)
15.26
(50´)
18.33
(60´1˝)
Max.
ET-D75LE3
ET-D75LE4
ET-D75LE8
3.0-5.0 : 1
5.0-8.0 : 1
7.9-15.0 : 1
Projection distance (L)
Max.
Min.
Min.
2.77
(9´1˝)
3.18
(10´5˝)
3.59
(11´9˝)
4.00
(13´1˝)
4.82
(15´9˝)
6.05
(19´10˝)
8.10
(26´6˝)
10.15
(33´3˝)
12.19
(39´11˝)
14.24
(46´8˝)
16.29
(53´5˝)
20.39
(66´10˝)
24.49
(80´4˝)
2.80
4.21
4.23
(9´2˝)
(13´9˝) (13´10˝)
3.21
4.83
4.84
(10´6˝) (15´10˝) (15´10˝)
3.62
5.45
5.46
(11´10˝) (17´10˝) (17´10˝)
4.04
6.07
6.08
(13´3˝) (19´10˝) (19´11˝)
4.86
7.30
7.31
(15´11˝) (23´11˝) (23´11˝)
6.09
9.15
9.16
(19´11˝)
(30´)
(30´)
8.15
12.24
12.25
(26´8˝)
(40´1˝)
(40´2˝)
10.21
15.33
15.34
(33´5˝)
(50´3˝)
(50´3˝)
12.27
18.41
18.42
(40´3˝)
(60´4˝)
(60´5˝)
14.32
21.50
21.51
(46´11˝) (70´6˝)
(70´6˝)
16.38
24.58
24.60
(53´8˝)
(80´7˝)
(80´8˝)
20.50
30.76
30.77
(67´3˝) (100´11˝) (100´11˝)
24.61
36.93
36.94
(80´8˝) (121´1˝) (121´2˝)
Max.
Min.
Max.
7.09
7.10
11.37
(23´3˝)
(23´3˝)
(37´3˝)
8.13
8.13
13.01
(26´8˝)
(26´8˝)
(42´8˝)
9.16
9.16
14.65
(30´)
(30´)
(48´)
10.19
10.19
16.29
(33´5˝)
(33´5˝)
(53´5˝)
12.25
12.26
19.57
(40´2˝)
(40´2˝)
(64´2˝)
15.34
15.35
24.49
(50´3˝)
(50´4˝)
(80´4˝)
20.50
20.50
32.69
(67´3˝)
(67´3˝) (107´3˝)
25.65
25.66
40.88
(84´1˝)
(84´2˝) (134´1˝)
30.81
30.81
49.08
(101´)
(101´)
(161´)
35.96
35.97
57.28
(117´11˝) (118´) (187´11˝)
41.12
41.12
65.47
(134´10˝) (134´10˝) (214´9˝)
51.42
51.43
81.87
(168´8˝) (168´8˝) (268´7˝)
61.73
61.74
98.26
(202´6˝) (202´6˝) (322´4˝)
Min.
11.09
(36´4˝)
12.73
(41´9˝)
14.37
(47´1˝)
16.01
(52´6˝)
19.29
(63´3˝)
24.21
(79´5˝)
32.40
(106´3˝)
40.60
(133´2˝)
48.80
(160´1˝)
57.00
(187´)
65.19
(213´10˝)
81.59
(267´8˝)
97.98
(321´5˝)
Max.
ET-D75LE6
ET-D75LE5
1.0-1.2 : 1
0.8 : 1
Min.
Max.
Fixed
21.14
1.39
(69´4˝)
(4´6˝)
24.21
1.60
(79´5˝)
(5´2˝)
27.29
1.81
(89´6˝)
(5´11˝)
30.36
2.01
(99´7˝)
(6´7˝)
36.50
2.43
(119´9˝) (7´11˝)
45.72
3.05
(150´)
(10´)
61.08
4.08
(200´4˝) (13´4˝)
76.44
5.12
(250´9˝) (16´9˝)
91.79
6.15
(301´1˝) (20´2˝)
107.15
7.19
(351´6˝) (23´7˝)
122.51
8.22
(401´11˝) (26´11˝)
153.23
10.29
(502´8˝) (33´9˝)
183.95
12.36
(603´6˝) (40´6˝)
1.66
(5´5˝)
1.91
(6´3˝)
2.16
(7´1˝)
2.41
(7´10˝)
2.90
(9´6˝)
3.65
(11´11˝)
4.89
(16´)
6.13
(20´1˝)
7.37
(24´2˝)
8.61
(28´2˝)
9.85
(32´3˝)
12.33
(40´5˝)
14.81
(48´7˝)
1.02 (3´4˝)
1.18 (3´10˝)
1.34 (4´4˝)
1.50 (4´11˝)
1.81 (5´11˝)
2.29 (7´6˝)
3.08 (10´1˝)
3.87 (12´8˝)
4.66 (15´3˝)
z For the screen aspect ratio of 16:9 (Units: m (feet/inches))
Lens type
Model number of
projection lens
*1
Throw ratio
Screen dimensions
ET-D75LE1
ET-D75LE2
1.5-2.0 : 1
2.0-3.0 : 1
Screen Effective Effective
size
height
width
Min.
(inch)
(SH)
(SW)
70
80
90
100
120
150
200
250
300
350
400
500
600
0.872
(2´10˝)
0.996
(3´3˝)
1.121
(3´8˝)
1.245
(4´1˝)
1.494
(4´10˝)
1.868
(6´1˝)
2.491
(8´2˝)
3.113
(10´2˝)
3.736
(12´3˝)
4.358
(14´3˝)
4.981
(16´4˝)
6.226
(20´5˝)
7.472
(24´6˝)
Fixed-focus
lens
Zoom lens
1.550
(5´1˝)
1.771
(5´9˝)
1.992
(6´6˝)
2.214
(7´3˝)
2.657
(8´8˝)
3.321
(10´10˝)
4.428
(14´6˝)
5.535
(18´1˝)
6.641
(21´9˝)
7.748
(25´5˝)
8.855
(29´)
11.069
(36´3˝)
13.283
(43´6˝)
2.26
(7´4˝)
2.60
(8´6˝)
2.93
(9´7˝)
3.27
(10´8˝)
3.93
(12´10˝)
4.94
(16´2˝)
6.61
(21´8˝)
8.28
(27´1˝)
9.95
(32´7˝)
11.62
(38´1˝)
13.29
(43´7˝)
16.63
(54´6˝)
19.97
(65´6˝)
Max.
Min.
Max.
3.02
(9´10˝)
3.47
(11´4˝)
3.92
(12´10˝)
4.36
(14´3˝)
5.26
(17´3˝)
6.60
(21´7˝)
8.83
(28´11˝)
11.06
(36´3˝)
13.29
(43´7˝)
15.52
(50´11˝)
17.76
(58´3˝)
22.22
(72´10˝)
26.69
(87´6˝)
3.06
4.60
(10´)
(15´1˝)
3.51
5.27
(11´6˝)
(17´3˝)
3.95
5.95
(12´11˝) (19´6˝)
4.40
6.62
(14´5˝)
(21´8˝)
5.30
7.96
(17´4˝)
(26´1˝)
6.64
9.98
(21´9˝)
(32´8˝)
8.89
13.34
(29´2˝)
(43´9˝)
11.13
16.70
(36´6˝)
(54´9˝)
13.37
20.07
(43´10˝) (65´10˝)
15.61
23.43
(51´2˝) (76´10˝)
17.85
26.79
(58´6˝) (87´10˝)
22.33
33.51
(73´3˝) (109´11˝)
26.82
40.24
(87´11˝) (132´)
ET-D75LE3
ET-D75LE4
ET-D75LE8
3.0-5.0 : 1
5.0-8.0 : 1
8.0-15.0 : 1
Projection distance (L)
Min.
Max.
Min.
4.61
(15´1˝)
5.28
(17´3˝)
5.96
(19´6˝)
6.63
(21´9˝)
7.97
(26´1˝)
9.99
(32´9˝)
13.35
(43´9˝)
16.71
(54´9˝)
20.08
(65´10˝)
23.44
(76´10˝)
26.80
(87´11˝)
33.52
(109´11˝)
40.25
(132´)
7.74
(25´4˝)
8.86
(29´)
9.99
(32´9˝)
11.11
(36´5˝)
13.35
(43´9˝)
16.72
(54´10˝)
22.34
(73´3˝)
27.95
(91´8˝)
33.57
(110´1˝)
39.18
(128´6˝)
44.80
(146´11˝)
56.03
(183´9˝)
67.26
(220´8˝)
7.75
(25´5˝)
8.87
(29´1˝)
9.99
(32´9˝)
11.11
(36´5˝)
13.36
(43´9˝)
16.73
(54´10˝)
22.34
(73´3˝)
27.96
(91´8˝)
33.57
(110´1˝)
39.19
(128´6˝)
44.80
(146´11˝)
56.03
(183´9˝)
67.26
(220´8˝)
Max.
Min.
Max.
ET-D75LE6
ET-D75LE5
1.0-1.2 : 1
0.8 : 1
Min.
Max.
Fixed
12.40
12.12
23.06
1.52
(40´8˝)
(39´9˝)
(75´7˝)
(4´11˝)
14.18
13.90
26.41
1.75
(46´6˝)
(45´7˝)
(86´7˝)
(5´8˝)
15.97
15.69
29.76
1.97
(52´4˝)
(51´5˝)
(97´7˝)
(6´5˝)
17.76
17.47
33.10
2.20
(58´3˝)
(57´3˝) (108´7˝)
(7´2˝)
21.33
21.04
39.79
2.65
(69´11˝)
(69´)
(130´6˝)
(8´8˝)
26.68
26.40
49.83
3.33
(87´6˝)
(86´7˝) (163´5˝) (10´11˝)
35.61
35.33
66.56
4.45
(116´9˝) (115´10˝) (218´4˝) (14´7˝)
44.54
44.26
83.29
5.58
(146´1˝) (145´2˝) (273´3˝) (18´3˝)
53.47
53.19
100.02
6.71
(175´5˝) (174´6˝) (328´1˝)
(22´)
62.40
62.12
116.75
7.84
(204´8˝) (203´9˝) (383´)
(25´8˝)
71.33
71.05
133.48
8.96
(234´) (233´1˝) (437´11˝) (29´4˝)
89.19
88.91
166.95
11.22
(292´7˝) (291´8˝) (547´8˝) (36´9˝)
107.04 106.77 200.41
13.47
(351´2˝) (350´3˝) (657´6˝) (44´2˝)
1.82
(5´11˝)
2.09
(6´10˝)
2.36
(7´8˝)
2.63
(8´7˝)
3.17
(10´4˝)
3.98
(13´)
5.33
(17´5˝)
6.68
(21´10˝)
8.03
(26´4˝)
9.38
(30´9˝)
10.73
(35´2˝)
13.43
(44´)
16.14
(52´11˝)
1.12 (3´8˝)
*1: “Throw ratio” is the approximate measurement range of the screen width to the projection distance.
24 – ENGLISH
1.29 (4´2˝)
1.47 (4´9˝)
1.64 (5´4˝)
1.98 (6´5˝)
2.50 (8´2˝)
3.36 (11´)
4.22 (13´10˝)
5.08 (16´8˝)
„ Calculation formulas for projection distance by lens types
(for PT-DZ12000U)
Model number of
projection lens
ET-D75LE1
ET-D75LE2
Zoom lens
ET-D75LE3
ET-D75LE4
ET-D75LE8
Fixed-focus lens
ET-D75LE6
ET-D75LE5
Throw ratio Aspect ratio
Projection distance (L) formula (Units: m)
1.4-1.8 : 1
16:10
Minimal distance : L = 0.0298 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0760
Maximal distance: L = 0.0399 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1004
1.4-1.8 : 1
16:9
Minimal distance : L = 0.0307 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0760
Maximal distance: L = 0.0410 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1004
1.6-2.2 : 1
4:3
Minimal distance : L = 0.0338 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0760
Maximal distance: L = 0.0451 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1004
1.8-2.8 : 1
16:10
Minimal distance : L = 0.0400 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0795
Maximal distance: L = 0.0601 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1064
1.8-2.8 : 1
16:9
Minimal distance : L = 0.0412 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0795
Maximal distance: L = 0.0617 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1064
2.2-3.3 : 1
4:3
Minimal distance : L = 0.0453 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0795
Maximal distance: L = 0.0680 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1064
2.8-4.6 : 1
16:10
Minimal distance : L = 0.0601 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0958
Maximal distance: L = 0.1003 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1216
2.8-4.6 : 1
16:9
Minimal distance : L = 0.0617 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0958
Maximal distance: L = 0.1031 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1216
3.3-5.6 : 1
4:3
Minimal distance : L = 0.0680 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0958
Maximal distance: L = 0.1136 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1216
4.6-7.4 : 1
16:10
Minimal distance : L = 0.1003 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1158
Maximal distance: L = 0.1595 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1013
4.6-7.4 : 1
16:9
Minimal distance : L = 0.1031 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1158
Maximal distance: L = 0.1639 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1013
5.6-8.9 : 1
4:3
Minimal distance : L = 0.1136 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1158
Maximal distance: L = 0.1806 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1013
7.3-13.8 : 1
16:10
Minimal distance : L = 0.1595 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.3862
Maximal distance: L = 0.2989 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.3598
7.3-13.8 : 1
16:9
Minimal distance : L = 0.1640 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.3862
Maximal distance: L = 0.3072 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.3598
8.8-16.5 : 1
4:3
Minimal distance : L = 0.1806 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.3862
Maximal distance: L = 0.3383 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.3598
0.9-1.1 : 1
16:10
Minimal distance : L = 0.0201 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0566
Maximal distance: L = 0.0241 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0736
0.9-1.1 : 1
16:9
Minimal distance : L = 0.0207 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0566
Maximal distance: L = 0.0248 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0736
1.1-1.3 : 1
4:3
Minimal distance : L = 0.0228 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0566
Maximal distance: L = 0.0273 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0736
0.7 : 1
16:10
L = 0.0154 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0835
0.7 : 1
16:9
L = 0.0158 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0835
0.8 : 1
4:3
L = 0.0174 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0835
Getting Started
If the projector is used with a screen size not listed in this manual, check the diagonal dimension (inch) of your
screen and calculate the projection distance using the following formulas.
ENGLISH – 25
Installation (continued)
„ Calculation formulas for projection distance by lens types (for PT-D12000U)
Model number of
projection lens
Throw ratio Aspect ratio
Minimal distance :
Maximal distance:
Minimal distance :
Maximal distance:
Minimal distance :
Maximal distance:
Minimal distance :
Maximal distance:
Minimal distance :
Maximal distance:
Minimal distance :
Maximal distance:
Minimal distance :
Maximal distance:
Minimal distance :
Maximal distance:
Minimal distance :
Maximal distance:
Minimal distance :
Maximal distance:
Minimal distance :
Maximal distance:
Minimal distance :
Maximal distance:
4:3
ET-D75LE1
1.5-2.0 : 1
16:9
4:3
ET-D75LE2
2.0-3.0 : 1
16:9
Zoom lens
4:3
ET-D75LE3
3.0-5.0 : 1
16:9
4:3
ET-D75LE4
5.0-8.0 : 1
16:9
7.9-15.0 : 1
4:3
8.0-15.0 : 1
16:9
ET-D75LE8
4:3
ET-D75LE6
1.0-1.2 : 1
Fixedfocus
lens
16:9
ET-D75LE5
Projection distance (L) formula (Units: m)
L = 0.0307 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0760
L = 0.0410 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1004
L = 0.0334 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0760
L = 0.0446 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1004
L = 0.0412 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0795
L = 0.0617 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1064
L = 0.0448 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0795
L = 0.0672 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1064
L = 0.0617 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0958
L = 0.1031 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1216
L = 0.0672 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0958
L = 0.1123 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1216
L = 0.1031 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1158
L = 0.1639 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1013
L = 0.1123 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1158
L = 0.1786 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.1013
L = 0.1640 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.3862
L = 0.3072 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.3598
L = 0.1786 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.3862
L = 0.3346 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.3598
L = 0.0207 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0566
L = 0.0248 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0736
L = 0.0225 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0566
L = 0.0270 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0736
4:3
L = 0.0158 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0835
16:9
L = 0.0172 × Screen diagonal (inch) – 0.0835
0.8 : 1
Installation dimensions diagram
Exhaust
50 cm (19.7˝)
or more
30 cm (11.8˝)
or more
30 cm (11.8˝) or more
Figure 1 : Dimensions applying when Figure 2 : Dimensions applying when Figure 3 : Maximum rotation
one unit is used
two units are used)
allowable
Exhaust
50 cm (19.7˝)
50 cm (19.7˝)
or more
or more
50 cm (19.7˝)
or more
Exhaust
+15°
+15°
+15°
+15°
OPEN
FILTER
CLEANING
CLOSE
40 cm (15.7˝)
or more
10 cm (3.9˝) or more
40 cm (15.7˝)
or more
Attention
• Leave a clearance of at least 50 cm (19.7˝) so that the ventilation opening on the rear panel will not be blocked.
• Set up the projector so that air can flow freely around the rear of the projector. In addition, leave a space of
30 cm (11.8˝) or more at the sides so that the hot air coming out from the air outlet vents does not get drawn in
through the air intake vents.
• Set up the projector with a space of 40 cm or more at the front so that the air filter can be replaced.
• When the projector is to be placed inside a box and used, ensure the structure has a duct or the like to
discharge air from the box, leave the clearances shown in Fig. 2, and ensure the temperature during operation
remains within the 0 °
C to 35 °
C range.
26 – ENGLISH
Before starting connection
• Before connection, read carefully the instruction manual for the device to be connected.
• Turning off the power switch of the devices before connecting cables.
• If any connection cable is not supplied with the device, or if no optional cable is available for connection of the
device, prepare a necessary system connection cable to suit the device.
• Video signals containing too much jitter may cause the images on the screen to randomly wobble or wafture. In
this case, a time base corrector (TBC) must be connected.
• The projector accepts the following signals: video, S-Video, analog RGB, DVI-D and signals which are
compatible with the optional input module (p. 30).
• Some PC models cannot be connected to the projector.
Getting Started
Connection
z The pin-out and signal names of the S-VIDEO IN terminal are shown in the diagram below.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Outside view
Signal
Ground (luminance signal)
Ground (color signal)
Luminance signal
Color signal
z The pin-out and signal names of the RGB2 IN terminal are shown in the diagram below.
Pin No.
1
2
3
m
n
Signal
R/PR
G/G • SYNC/Y
B/PB
HD/SYNC
VD
Outside view
4, 9, l,and o are not assigned.
5-8, j and k are GND terminals.
z The pin-out and signal names of the DVI-D IN terminal are shown in the diagram below.
x
Pin No.
q
p
9
8
1
Outside view
Signal
1
2
T.M.D.S data 2–
T.M.D.S data 2+
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
j
k
l
Pin No.
Signal
T.M.D.S data 2 / 4 shield
m
n
o
p
q
r
+5V
Ground
Hot plug detection
T.M.D.S data 0T.M.D.S data 0+
DDC clock
DDC data
s
T.M.D.S data 0 / 5 shield
T.M.D.S data 1–
T.M.D.S data 1+
T.M.D.S data 1 / 3 shield
t
u
v
w
x
T.M.D.S clock shield
T.M.D.S clock+
T.M.D.S clock–
ENGLISH – 27
Connection (continued)
Example of connecting with VIDEO devices
Control PC
Control PC
Control PC
Video deck (TBC built-in)
IN
OUT
REMOTE 1
RS-232C IN
REMOTE 2 IN
IN
OUT
VIDEO S-VIDEO IN
R/PR
G/Y
SYNC/HD
RGB 1 IN
RS-422 IN
SERIAL
RS-422 OUT
LAN
B/PB
VD
RGB 2 IN
DVI-D IN
Red (connected to PR terminal)
Blue (connected to PB terminal)
Green (connected to Y terminal)
Color monitor
Video deck (TBC built-in)
DVD player
DVD player with HDMI
(HDCP) terminal
Attention
• When connecting with a video deck, be sure to use the one with a built-in time base corrector (TBC) or use a
TBC between the projector and the video deck.
• If nonstandard burst signals are connected, the image may be distorted. If this is the case, connect a TBC
between the projector and the video deck.
Note
•
•
•
•
The DVI-D signal input terminal supports only a single link.
The HDMI-DVI-D conversion cable is required to connect an HDMI-compliant device.
When using the DVI-D input, EDID settings may be required for the connected device. (pp. 73, 74)
It is possible to connect the DVI-D input terminal with an HDMI- or DVI-D-compliant device, but with some
devices the images may not appear or other problems may be encountered in operation.
28 – ENGLISH
Control PC
Control PC
To 2nd projector
(SERIAL IN terminal)
IN
OUT
REMOTE 1
RS-232C IN
REMOTE 2 IN
RS-422 IN
SERIAL
Getting Started
Example of connecting with personal computers
RS-422 OUT
LAN
Control PC
IN
OUT
VIDEO S-VIDEO IN
R/PR
G/Y
SYNC/HD
RGB 1 IN
B/PB
VD
RGB 2 IN
DVI-D IN
I/F
PC
PC
PC
Attention
• When the main power of the main unit is turned off, also turn off the power of the PC.
• When the length of the cable from a PC to the projector is long or when there are many relay devices such as
switches, the video may be interrupted or fuzzy. In such a case, use a cable compensator.
Note
• For the specifications of the RGB signals that can be applied from the PC, see the data sheet on pages
122-123.
• If your PC has the resume feature (last memory), the computer may not function properly until the resume
capability is disabled.
• When using the DVI-D input, EDID settings may be required for the connected device. (pp. 73, 74)
ENGLISH – 29
Installation of (optional) input modules
Installing the input module
„ Types of the input modules (optional)
Prepare beforehand an input module (optional) compatible with the input signals of the system.
Module
SD-SDI
input module
Module model
No.
ET-MD77SD1
Terminal
BNC input × 1
BNC output × 1
RJ-45 input × 1
ET-MD77SD3
*1
DVI-D
input module
SMPTE259M compliant : 480i, 576i
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
BNC input × 1
BNC output × 1
SMPTE259M compliant : 480i, 576i
SMPTE292M compliant :
720/60p, 720/59.94p, 720/50p
1 035/60i, 1 035/59.94i, 1 080/60i, 1 080/59.94i
1 080/50i, 1 080/24sF, 1 080/23.98sF, 1 080/30p
1 080/29.97p, 1 080/25p, 1 080/24p, 1 080/23.98p
RJ-45 input × 1*1
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
BNC input × 2
Single link SD-SDI Signal : 480i, 576i
Single link HD-SDI Signal (YPBPR 4:2:2) :
720/60p, 720/59.94p, 720/50p, 1 080/60i,
1 080/59.94i, 1 080/50i, 1 080/24sF, 1 080/23.98sF,
1 080/30p, 1 080/29.97p, 1 080/25p, 1 080/24p,
1 080/23.98p
Dual link HD-SDI signal (RGB 4:4:4) :
1 920 × 1 080/50i, 1 920 × 1 080/59.94i,
1 920 × 1 080/60i, 1 920 × 1 080/23.98p,
1 920 × 1 080/23.98sF, 1 920 × 1 080/25p,
1 920 × 1 080/24p, 1 920 × 1 080/24sF,
1 920 × 1 080/29.97p, 1 920 × 1 080/30p
Dual link HD-SDI signal (X’ Y’ Z’ 4:4:4) :
2 048 × 1 080/23.98p, 2 048 × 1 080/23.98sF,
2 048 × 1 080/24p, 2 048 × 1 080/24sF
DVI-D 24p input × 1
HDCP-compliant*2 DVI-D single link, DVI 1.0 compliant
480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/59.94p, 720/50p
1 080/60i, 1 080/59.94i, 1 080/50i、1 080/24sF,
1 080/23.98sF
1 080/30p, 1 080/29.97p, 1 080/25p, 1 080/24p,
1 080/23.98p
1 080/60p, 1 080/59.94p, 1 080/50p
Displayable resolution VGA - WUXGA*3 (non-interlace)
Dot clock frequency 25 - 162 MHz
HD/SD-SDI
input module
ET-MD100SD4
Signal formats supported
ET-MD77DV
RJ-45 input × 1
*1
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
*1: The LAN terminal present on the optional input module cannot be used with the PT-D12000U/PT-DZ12000U.
Use the LAN terminal that is provided as standard with the projector.
*2: HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection)
HDCP is a specification for encoding digital image signals which was developed to protect digital content.
The DVI-D/HDMI output signals from the HDCP-compliant equipment have been encoded by the HDCP
specifications to ensure content protection, but the DVI-D input module is capable of displaying the digital
images properly since it complies with the HDCP specification.
*3: The WUXGA signals support only VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking) signals.
30 – ENGLISH
„ Procedure of installation
IN
OUT
REMOTE 1
RS-232C IN
REMOTE 2 IN
RS-422 IN
SERIAL
MENU
RS-422 OUT
Getting Started
Disconnect the power before installing the input module.
LENS
LAN
POWER ON
STANDBY
VIDEO
R/PR
IN
OUT
VIDEO S-VIDEO IN
G/Y
SYNC/HD
RGB 1 IN
ENTER
B/PB
S-VIDEO
RGB1
VD
RGB 2 IN
DVI-D IN
RGB2
DVI-D
AUTO
SETUP
SHUTTER
LIGHT
ON
AUX
OFF
OFF
AC IN
ON
MAIN POWER
Slot Cover
1. Remove the slot cover.
Remove 2 screws.
2. Insert the input module.
Slot
Input module
3. Install the two screws.
4. Register the input signal.
• This projector needs to register the type of input
signal after the installation of the input module.
• For details on the registration of the input
signals, refer to pages 45-47.
Tighten the two screws.
ENGLISH – 31
Installation of (optional) input modules (continued)
Connecting signals to the input module
When installing the projector, it is necessary to connect signals to the input module in accordance with the
connecting equipment.
Refer to the following diagram to establish proper signal connection.
SD-SDI input module
ET-MD77SD1
Professional
Digital VCR
SDI
signal
HD/SD-SDI input module
ET-MD77SD3
Dual link HD/SD-SDI input module
ET-MD100SD4
Projector
DVD player
IN
OUT
REMOTE 1
RS-232C IN
REMOTE 2 IN
RS-422 IN
SERIAL
MENU
RS-422 OUT
LENS
LAN
POWER ON
STANDBY
VIDEO
IN
OUT
VIDEO S-VIDEO IN
R/PR
G/Y
SYNC/HD
RGB 1 IN
ENTER
B/PB
S-VIDEO
RGB1
VD
RGB 2 IN
DVI-D IN
RGB2
DVI-D
AUTO
SETUP
SHUTTER
LIGHT
ON
AUX
OFF
OFF
AC IN
High-vision
video deck
DVI-D
signal
DVI-D input module
ET-MD77DV
PC
Note
• Insert the input module suitable for the input signal specifications.
• Normally, use SYSTEM SELECTOR in “AUTO”. (pp. 58-59)
32 – ENGLISH
ON
MAIN POWER
SD-SDI input module (optional)
ET-MD77SD1 (for 480i/576i)
SD-SDI Module
ET-MD77SD1
IN
SERIAL
OUT
LAN
LAN terminal*1
(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
SD-SDI signal
SD-SDI signal output
(active through)
Getting Started
Connecting the signal to the SD-SDI input module
Professional
Digital VCR
Note
• If a source with an unstable signal is connected, errors in automatic signal recognition may occur. If this
happens, use the SYSTEM SELECTOR menu to switch the format to the one which matches the signals being
input.
• You can switch the input format mode from the SYSTEM SELECTOR menu. (pp. 58-59)
*1: The LAN terminal present on the optional input module cannot be used with the PT-D12000U/PT-DZ12000U.
Use the LAN terminal that is provided as standard with the projector.
Connecting the signal to the HD/SD-SDI input module
HD/SD-SDI input module (optional)
ET-MD77SD3 (for HD/SD)
HD/SD-SDI
Module
ET-MD77SD3
IN
SERIAL
OUT
LAN
LAN terminal*1
(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
HD-SDI or SD-SDI
signal
HD-SDI or SD-SDI
signal output
(active through)
Professional
Digital VCR
Note
• You can switch the input format mode from the SYSTEM SELECTOR menu. (pp. 58-59)
• If a source with an unstable signal is connected, errors in automatic signal recognition may occur. If this
happens, use the SYSTEM SELECTOR menu to switch the format to the one which matches the signals being
input.
• To ensure full imaging performance, use a connecting cable with the specifications of Canare 5CFB or higher, or
of Belden1694A or higher.
(For example: Canare 5CFB, 5CFTX, 7CFB, Belden1694A, etc.)
*1: The LAN terminal present on the optional input module cannot be used with the PT-D12000U/PT-DZ12000U.
Use the LAN terminal that is provided as standard with the projector.
ENGLISH – 33
Installation of (optional) input modules (continued)
Connecting the signal to the dual link HD/SD-SDI input
module
Dual link HD/SD-SDI input module (optional)
ET-MD100SD4
Dual Link
HD-SDI
Module
ET-MD100SD4
LINK-A
SERIAL IN
LINK-B
HD-SDI or
SD-SDI signal
Professional
Digital VCR
• When connecting a single link signal, connect to the LINK-A terminal.
• When connecting a dual link signal, connect to both the LINK-A and LINK-B terminals.
Note
• You can switch the input format mode from the SYSTEM SELECTOR menu. (pp. 58-59)
• Settings specific to the connected device are required. (pp. 74-75)
• To send the pictures properly, use a connecting cable with the specifications of Canare 5CFB or higher (5CFB,
7CFB, etc.) or of Belden1694A or higher. Also, use a cable that is shorter than 100 m.
• Make sure that the cables used to link LINK-A terminal and LINK-B terminal are of the same type and length.
If there is a difference in length greater than 4 m between the two cables, the images will not be projected
correctly.
• When connecting to dual link signals, connect directly to the signal output device without connecting through a
distributor or other such device. A phase difference may occur between the LINK-A signal and LINK-B signal,
which may prevent the image from being correctly projected.
• If the connected signal is unstable, the signal auto-detect function may not operate correctly. In this case,
switch to a mode that better suits the signal format from the SYSTEM SELECTOR menu.
34 – ENGLISH
Getting Started
Connecting signals to the DVI-D input module
DVI-D input module (optional)
ET-MD77DV
DVI Module
ET-MD77DV
DVI-D IN
LAN terminal*1
(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
DVI-D signal
PC with DVI output
DVD player or high-vision
video deck equipped with
DVD/HDMI terminal
• Pin assignments and signal names of DVI-D input
terminal are listed in the table at right.
1
p
q
x
Outside view
Pin
No.
1
2
8
9
LAN
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
j
k
l
Signal
Pin
No.
T.M.D.S data 2–
T.M.D.S data 2+
T.M.D.S data 2 / 4
shield
m
n
o
p
q
r
DDC clock
DDC data
s
T.M.D.S data 1–
T.M.D.S data 1+
T.M.D.S data 1 / 3
shield
Signal
+5V
Ground
Hot plug detection
T.M.D.S data 0T.M.D.S data 0+
T.M.D.S data 0 / 5
shield
t
u
v
T.M.D.S clock shield
w
T.M.D.S clock+
x
T.M.D.S clock–
Note
•
•
•
•
The DVI-D signal input module supports only a single link.
The HDMI-DVI-D conversion cable is required to connect an HDMI-compliant device.
When using the DVI-D input, EDID settings may be required for the connected device. (pp. 73, 74)
It is possible to connect the DVI-D input module with an HDMI- or DVI-D-compliant device, but with some
devices the images may not appear or other problems may be encountered in operation.
*1: The LAN terminal present on the optional input card cannot be used with the PT-D12000U/PT-DZ12000U. Use
the LAN terminal that is provided as standard with the projector.
ENGLISH – 35
How to install and remove the projection lens (optional)
Adjust the lens shift position so that it is at the home
position (p. 41) before installing or removing the
projection lens.
3. Push the projection lens cover in
until it clicks into place.
Attention
• Remove the dust-proof sponge from the lens fitting
of the projector before installing the projection lens.
(Keep the dust-proof sponge in a safe place for
later use if needed.)
• After removing the projection lens, install the dustproof sponge to the lens fitting of the projector in
order to stop dust from getting inside the projector.
How to install the
projection lens
1. While pressing the projection
lens cover lock button, pull the
cover forward to remove it.
How to remove the
projection lens
1. While pressing the projection
lens cover lock button, pull the
cover forward to remove it.
OPEN
FILTER
CLEANING
CLOSE
OPEN
FILTER
CLEANING
CLOSE
Projection lens cover lock button
Projection lens cover lock button
2. Align the mark (orange) on
the projection lens with the
mark on the projector ( ), and
then insert the lens and turn
it clockwise until it clicks into
place.
2. While holding down the
projection lens lock button,
turn the projection lens counter
clockwise, and then pull it off.
Projection lens lock button
Mark (orange)
36 – ENGLISH
Projection
Power indicator lamp
OPEN
FILTER
CLEANING
CLOSE
This shows the power supply status. Make sure
that you fully understand the operation of the power
indicator lamp before operating the projector.
Indicator
status
Off
Projector status
Main power is off
Red
Lit
Standby mode
POWER ON ( | ) button can be pressed
so that images can be projected.
Green
Lit
Images are being projected (on)
Orange
Lit
Cooling mode
After a short while, the projector will
switch to standby mode.
Attention
• While the projector is in cooling mode (when the
power indicator lamp is lit orange), the internal fan
is running to cool down the projector. Do not turn
off the MAIN POWER switch or disconnect the
power cord at this time.
Note
• If the POWER ON “ | ” button is pressed while
the projector is still in cooling mode, it may take
some time before the projector is ready to project
pictures.
Connecting the power
cord
Insert the accessory power cord securely into the
projector and the electrical outlet.
Be sure to read the “IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE”
(pp. 4-5) and “Precautions with regard to safety”
(pp. 6-9) for details on handling the power cord.
„ Installation
Basic Operation
Power indicator lamp
Lock Button
1. Check the shape of the AC
IN terminal on the side of the
projector and the shape of the
power cord connector, and insert
the power cord securely into the
AC IN terminal.
2. Insert the power cord plug into
an electrical outlet.
„ Removal
1. Check that the MAIN POWER
switch on the projector is at
the OFF “○” position, and then
disconnect the power cord plug
from the electrical outlet.
2. Remove the power cord from the
AC IN terminal while pressing
the lock button on the power
cord connector.
Attention
• Connect all peripheral equipment to the projector
before connecting the projector’s power cord.
(pp. 28-29)
ENGLISH – 37
Projection (continued)
6
3
5
4, 8-l
3
9
6
5
4, k
12
8
j
7
9
Powering up the projector
1 Connect the supplied power
cable. (120 V/240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz)
2 Press the “ | ” marked side of the
MAIN POWER switch to turn on
the power.
• The power indicator lamp on the projector will
flash in red. After a short period, the indicator
will illuminate and the projector will enter
standby mode.
3 Press POWER ON “ | ”.
• The power indicator lamp illuminates in green
and soon the image is projected on the screen.
Note
• If the projector is powered up at about 0 °
C, a
warm-up period of approximately 5 minutes may
be necessary to start projection. The temperature
monitor (TEMP) lamp lights up during the warm-up
period. When the warm-up is completed, the
temperature monitor (TEMP) lamp turns off and the
image is projected on the screen.
• If the temperature of the operating environment is
low and warm-up takes more than 5 minutes, the
projector will judge that a problem has occurred
and the power will be turned off automatically. If
this happens, increase the temperature around the
projector so that it is 0 °
C or higher, and then turn
on the MAIN POWER switch and the POWER ON
“ | ” switch once more.
Making adjustment and
selection
4 Roughly adjust the focus of the
lens. (p. 40)
5 Select and set the projection
scheme. (p. 78)
6 Select the input signal by
pressing the input selector
button RGB1, RGB2, DVI-D,
VIDEO, S-VIDEO and AUX. (p. 48)
• The AUX button is disabled when an optional
input module is not connected.
7 Adjust the tilt of the main unit in
front and rear or right and left.
(p. 20)
8 Adjust the H & V Lens shift as
required. (p. 40)
9 Press AUTO SETUP if the input
signal is RGB signal. (p. 49)
j Zoom the lens so the image fills
the screen. (p. 40)
k Adjust the focus. (p. 40)
l Readjust the zoom so that the
image size fits in the screen.
(p. 40)
38 – ENGLISH
3
1
2
1
2
Powering off the projector
1 Press POWER STANDBY “ ”.
• A confirmation screen will appear.
POWER OFF
OK
ENTER
CANCEL
CHANGE
EXECUTE
2 Press ◄ or ► to select “OK” and
press ENTER.
(or press POWER STANDBY “ ”
again.)
• The projection of the image stops, and the
power indicator lamp of the main unit lights up
orange. (The cooling fan keeps running.)
Note
• In the cooling state after the power is turned off, the
lamp will not light up even if the power is turned on.
To light up the lamp, turn on the power supply again
when the lamp has been cooled sufficiently.
• The projector consumes approximately 15 W (240 V
mode) and 10 W (120 V mode) of power even in
standby mode. (Power indicator lamp lit in red)
• If the main power is mistakenly turned off during
use, the lamp may not relight after power is
restored. Please wait a few moments, then try
again.
Basic Operation
4
Be sure to set the date and time when
the projector is turned on for the first
time after being purchased. For details,
refer to “Setting the date and time” on
page 83.
3 Wait until the power indicator
lamp of the main unit turns to
red (i.e., until the cooling fan
stops). (Approx. 3 minutes)
• While the cooling fan is still running, never turn
off the MAIN POWER switch, nor unplug the
projector from the outlet.
4 Press the “○” marked side of the
MAIN POWER switch to remove
all power from the projector.
ENGLISH – 39
How to adjust the lens
How to adjust the focus, zoom and shift
Use the Lens Shift, Zoom, and Focus controls to properly frame the image on the screen.
„ At the projector
LENS
FOCUS
ADJUST
1. Press LENS on the control panel.
LENS
ZOOM
ADJUST
2. Press ▲▼◄► to select an item
and adjust it.
• Pressing the button changes the setup
screen in the order of “FOCUS”, “ZOOM” and
“SHIFT”.
LENS
SHIFT
ADJUST
LENS
FOCUS
ADJUST
LENS
ZOOM
ADJUST
„ Using the remote control
1. Press LENS (FOCUS, ZOOM,
SHIFT) on the remote control.
2. Press ▲▼◄► to select an item
and adjust it.
LENS
SHIFT
ADJUST
CAUTION:
Be careful not to catch your fingers between the lens and shroud when shifting the lens.
Note
• Only “FOCUS” is displayed with the background colors set with OSD DESIGN, to distinguish the displayed
adjustment menu by color, even if the characters cannot be read and look out of focus. (p. 75)
• The zoom adjustment menu will be displayed only when a lens with zoom function is installed.
40 – ENGLISH
Adjustment range after lens position (optical shift)
Do not move the lens beyond the bounds of the shift range as this may cause a change in the focus. This
limitation is to protect the parts of the projector.
Using the standard projection position as the reference, the optical axis shift function makes it possible to adjust
the projection position in the ranges shown in the figures below.
Projected screen
width, H
0.15V
0.15V
0.15V
Projected
screen height, V
0.15V
Standard
projection position
0.15V
0.1V
0.3H
0.50V
0.1V
Standard
projection position
0.3H
0.15H
Projected screen
width, H
0.50V
0.1V
Projected
screen height, V
0.1V
ET-D75LE1
ET-D75LE2
ET-D75LE3
ET-D75LE4
ET-D75LE8
0.50V
0.15V
0.15H
Projected screen
width, H
0.2H
Basic Operation
0.2H
0.50V
Projected
screen height, V0.15V
Standard
projection position
0.60V
Zoom Lens
0.2H
0.40V
0.12V
0.12V
Standard
projection position
0.15V
0.12V
Projected
screen height, V
ET-D75LE6
PT-DZ12000U
0.40V
0.12V
PT-D12000U
0.60V
Model number of
projection lens
0.2H
Projected screen
width, H
Note
• The ET-D75LE5 has a fixed focal point, and so shift adjustment cannot be carried out.
Moving the projection lens position to the home position
1. Press and hold LENS on the projector’s controls or SHIFT on the remote
control for 3 seconds or more.
LENS
SHIFT
ENTER EXECUTE
MENU CANCEL
2. Press ENTER while the menu shown above is being displayed. (It will be
displayed for about 5 seconds.)
• “PROGRESS...” will appear in the menu, and the projection lens will move to the home position.
Note
• The home position for the projection lens is the lens position when the lens is being replaced or when the
projector is being stored away, and it is not the optical center of the screen.
ENGLISH – 41
How to adjust the lens (continued)
Lens adjustment to compensate for uneven screen focus
„ About the focus balance
z Relationship between lens orientation and screen focus
If the projection lens is tilted with respect to the plane of the screen, uneven focus will result.
Figure 1: Illustration of influence of lens orientation
Projection lens
Image formation surface (DMD image plane)
Screen surface versus focal point
„ Procedure for adjusting the focus balance (tilt compensation in the lens
mount)
Three focus adjustment screws on the lens mount may be used to compensate for uneven screen focus.
z Structure of lens mount (Figure 2, Figure 3)
The three adjustment screws allow the lens to be tilted up and down, and three more screws lock down the
adjustment.
Figure 2 : Front view of lens mount (when viewed from screen side)
Lens bracket a
Locking screw
c
b
(Adjust the focus adjustment screws a, b and c after installing the lens.)
Figure 3 : Cross section view of the lens mount
Lens tilt direction
(when adjustment screws
turned counterclockwise)
Screen direction
Lens bracket Adjustment Locking screw
Lens flange
screw
Hole for Allen hex socket driver Spring
42 – ENGLISH
If the lens is heavy or the projector is installed so that it is tilted, the lens may be tilted, resulting in the focus
becoming unbalanced.
In such a case, refer to the figure 4 and table below, and follow the procedure below to perform adjustment.
z Adjustment procedure
1 Display the internal test pattern grid, and defocus the image.
2 Adjust the lens focus till one or more sides of the grid comes into focus. Note the appropriate screws
for the out-of-focus sides of the grid as described below.
3 Remove the lens cover and lens.
4 Loosen the locking screws for each of the adjustment screws a, b and c as needed, following the
indications in the example. The screws to be adjusted correspond to the out-of-focus sides of the
image.
• Be careful because turning a screw more than twice to loosen it will result in the spring becoming detached
and the projector needing to be repaired.
• Make adjustments in up to two places, and fully turn the screw clockwise in at least one place.
5 Reinstall the lens. The adjustment screws can be accessed through the lens flange.
6 Turn the adjustment screws (corresponding to the locking screws loosened in step 4) counterclockwise
slightly till the out-of-focus image sides are in focus. (Turning the screws counterclockwise moves the
lens bracket and tilts the lens toward the screen.)
7 Readjust the lens shift position with the remote if needed.
8 Refocus the image as in steps 1 and 2 above. Fine adjust the focus evenness as needed, as described in
step 6.
9 When adjustment is complete, remove the lens and then tighten the locking screws.
j Install the lens and lens cover.
Basic Operation
Attention
Tool to be used: Allen hex socket driver or Allen wrench (2.5 mm diagonal hexagon)
An Allen wrench is supplied with the ET-D75LE6 and ET-D75LE8 optional lens.
Figure 4 : Relation between the adjustment place and adjustment screw
c
b
V up
b+c
H right
H left
c+(a)
b+(a)
V bottom
ac
a
ab
Projector
Screen
Adjustment place: The place where the just-in-focus point is at the back.
When optimal focus
When optimal focus is
point is at front of screen at front of screen for V
for V up
bottom
a
When optimal focus is at
front of screen for H left
When optimal focus is
at front of screen for H
right
Turn counterclockwise
b
Turn counterclockwise
c
Turn counterclockwise
Turn counterclockwise
Turn counterclockwise
ENGLISH – 43
How to adjust the lens (continued)
z Precautions for projector installation work
When installing the projector without using the adjustable feet, insert metal spacers (10 mm to 20 mm)
between the projector base and the installation surface to ensure adequate airflow. Furthermore, use the screw
holes (shown in the figure) for ceiling mounting to fix the projector in place. (Screw diameter: M6, set inside
screw length: 8 mm maximum)
Note that if the cabinet is touching the installation surface when used, it may take a while until the images
stabilize after the power is turned on.
Ceiling mounting screws (M6)
Base
Spacers
Gap (10 mm to 20 mm)
Make sure air can circulate
around the air intake
vent. Failure to do so may
result in the projector not
operating properly.
44 – ENGLISH
Registration of input signal data
Registration of new data
When a new format input signal is applied to the
projector, press MENU on the remote control or
operating section of the main unit. When its data
has been registered, the “MAIN MENU” screen is
displayed.
▲▼◄►
ENTER
DEFAULT
The input signal data must be registered because
it is not registered on shipment of the projector.
MENU
Press to display the MAIN
MENU screen.
Press to select “SIGNAL
LIST”.
Press to display the
“REGISTERED SIGNAL
LIST” menu.
• The memories extend
over 12 pages (A to L with
8 data items each, giving
a total of 96 memories).
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
ENTER
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
• The data of 96 input signals can be registered in the
projector’s memory.
• Signals appropriate to the optional input cards
will also be registered in the memories as they are
input.
• The 96 memories are numbered over 12 pages (A
to L: 8 data items can be registered on each page),
and the data is registered in the unused memory
location with the lowest number. If all the memories
are filled, the data of the old signals is overwritten in
sequence.
• The names of the registered data are automatically
determined according to the type of signal and the
available memory number, but they can be renamed
as described below.
• If a menu is being displayed, the new signals will be
registered at the instant they are input.
Basic Operation
Note
MENU
Renaming the registered signals
1. Press ▲▼◄ ► to select the
signal whose details are to be
displayed.
REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST
A1:SVGA72-A1
RGB1
A2:SVGA72-A2
RGB1
A3:SVGA72-A3
RGB1
−−−
−−−
−−−
2. Press ENTER.
• The “REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS” screen
will be displayed.
REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS
NAME
MEMORY NO
INPUT
fH
fV
SYNC.STATE
SVGA72-A2
A2
RGB1
48.08kHz
72.17Hz
H(POS)
V(POS)
• The data items including the input signal name,
memory number, input terminal, frequency and
sync signal are automatically identified and
displayed.
• When MENU is pressed, the “REGISTERED
SIGNAL LIST” screen is restored.
3. Press ENTER.
• The “RENAME” screen will be displayed.
ENGLISH – 45
Registration of input signal data (continued)
4. Use ▲▼◄► to select the
characters and numerals one by
one, and press ENTER to set them.
RENAME
NAME
SVGA72-A2
MEMORY NO
A2
INPUT
RGB1
fH
48.08kHz
fV
72.17Hz
A B C D E F G H I J K H(POS)
L M N O
SYNC.STATE
P Q R S T U V W X Y Z V(POS)
; : , .
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
p q r s t u v w x y z / + - *
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
<
>
BS
OK
_ @ [ ]
CANCEL
5. Once the name has been
changed, press ▲▼◄► to select
“OK” and then press ENTER.
• After registration, the “REGISTERED SIGNAL
STATUS” screen is restored.
• If you would like to cancel the changes to the
signal name, use ▲▼◄► to select “CANCEL”
and then press ENTER. The changes will be
cancelled and the displayed signal name will
remain as it is.
Clearing Registered
Signals data
1. Press ▲▼◄► to select the signal
whose data is to be cleared.
REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST
A1:NTSC-A1
VIDEO
A2:SVGA72-A2
RGB1
A3:SXGA+60-A3
RGB1
A4:VGA60-A4
RGB1
A5:VGA85-A5
RGB1
A6:NTSC-A6
S-VIDEO
A7:1080i/60i-A7
RGB1
A8:1080/24p-A8
RGB1
−−−
−−−
−−−
−−−
−−−
−−−
−−−
−−−
2. Press DEFAULT.
• The “ENTRY SIGNAL CLEAR” screen will be
displayed.
• If the data is not to be cleared, press MENU to
return to the “SIGNAL LIST” screen.
ENTRY SIGNAL CLEAR
NAME
MEMORY NO
INPUT
fH
fV
SYNC.STATE
SURE?
SVGA72-A2
A2
RGB1
48.08kHz
72.17Hz
H(POS)
V(POS)
3. Press ENTER.
• The data of the signal selected is cleared.
46 – ENGLISH
Sub memory
The projector has a sub-memory function that can be
used to store several sets of adjustments for a given
registered signal.
Sub-memories should be used when the operator
needs to preadjust the picture settings or white
balance, or to change the aspect setting when using
signals from the same input source.
Sub-memory contains all data that can be adjusted
such as screen aspect ratio and image adjustment
data (BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST etc.).
„ How to register into sub memory
A new input signal must first be registered before
it can be saved to a sub-memory.
1. Press ◄► on normal screen
(menu is not displayed).
• A “Check sub-memory registration” screen will
appear if sub-memory has not been registered.
• The screen will show a list of the sub-memories
registered for the currently entered signal.
• If “SUB MEMORY” is selected from the
“FUNC1” menu in the “PROJECTOR SETUP”
menu, you can use the FUNC1 button instead
of the ◄► buttons. (p. 83)
Check sub-memory registration screen
REGISTER SUB MEMORY?
NAME
MEMORY NO
INPUT
fH
fV
SYNC.STATE
SXGA60-A1
A1
RGB1
64.00kHz
60.00Hz
H(POS)
V(POS)
SUB MEMORY LIST screen
SUB MEMORY LIST
1-1:SXGA60-A1
1-2:SXGA60-A2
1-3:–––
1-4:–––
1-5:–––
1-6:–––
1-7:–––
1-8:–––
2. Press ▲▼◄► to select the SUB
MEMORY number stored in the
“SUB MEMORY LIST”.
2 Details of registered signal
3. Press ENTER.
• A “Change registered signals” screen will appear.
RENAME
NAME
MEMORY NO
INPUT
fH
fV
A B C D E F G H I J K
SYNC.STATE
SXGA60-A1
A1
RGB1
64.00kHz
60.00Hz
L M N O
H(POS)
P Q R S T U V W X Y Z V(POS)
; : , .
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
p q r s t u v w x y z / + - *
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
<
>
BS
OK
REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS
NAME
MEMORY NO
INPUT
fH
fV
SYNC.STATE
SXGA60-A1
A5 (1-2)
RGB1
63.98kHz
60.02Hz
H(POS)
V(POS)
• The designation can be set by the sub memory
items.
MEMORY NO : A1 (1-2)
_ @ [ ]
CANCEL
4. Press ENTER.
The place in which address code (A1,
A2, ..., H7 and H8) signals are registered
Note
• To rename a registered signal, perform steps 4 and
5 on page 46.
„ Procedure to switch to sub
memory
1. Press ◄► on normal screen
(when the menu is not
displayed).
Note
Restrictions
• The total number of registered signals (including
any corresponding sub-memories) is 96.
Basic Operation
Sub memory number
• The screen will show a list of the sub-memories
registered for the currently entered signal.
2. Press ▲▼◄► to select the
sub-memory signal to be
switched in the “SUB MEMORY
LIST”.
3. Press ENTER.
• The sub-memory selected in step 2 will now
become active.
„ How to erase sub memory
The currently selected SUB MEMORY is deleted
by pressing DEFAULT at the “REGISTERED
SIGNAL LIST”.
„ On-screen indications
1 Input switching / signal switching
This shows the registered signal name on the
status screen for signal switching.
INPUT
NAME
MEMORY NO
RGB1
RGB
A1(1-2)
ENGLISH – 47
Basic operations using the remote control
Switching the input signal
AUTO
SETUP
INPUT
SELECT
SHUTTER
ON
SCREEN
ASPECT
TEST
PATTERN
FUNC1
STATUS
LIGHT
You can use the remote control to switch the signals
that are being input and projected.
1. Press INPUT SELECT on the
remote control or the main unit.
• Press RGB1:
Switches to RGB1 input.
• Press RGB2:
Switches to RGB2 input.
• Press DVI-D:
Switches to DVI-D input.
• Press VIDEO:
Switches to video input.
• Press S-VIDEO:
Switches to S-VIDEO input.
• Press AUX:
Switches to optional input module input.
(The AUX button to switch the input is
disabled when an optional input module is not
connected.)
Note
• Refer to “Connection” for details on the input
terminals. (pp. 27-29)
Using the SHUTTER
function
If the projector is not used for a certain period of
time during the meeting intermission, for example, a
shutter mode is available that allows the user to hide
images temporarily.
1. Press SHUTTER on the remote
control or the main unit.
• The projected light is blocked by the internal
shutter.
2. Press SHUTTER again.
• Projection resumes.
On-screen display
function
This button electronically mutes the onscreen menus
to avoid disrupting the program.
1. Press ON SCREEN on the
remote control.
48 – ENGLISH
Status function
Pressing this button displays several pages of
projector status information. It can also be used to
send information about the projector’s status via
e-mail.
1. Press STATUS on the remote
control.
• The “STATUS” screen will be displayed.
STATUS
INPUT
NAME
SIGNAL FREQUENCY
PROJECTOR RUNTIME
LAMP1
LAMP2
LAMP3
LAMP4
INTAKE AIR TEMP.
OPTICS MODULE TEMP.
AROUND LAMP TEMP.
REMOTE2 STATUS
1/3
RGB2
XGA60-A399999
48.36kHz/59.99Hz
76h
341h / ON /
334h / ON /
342h / ON /
97h / ON /
31°C/87°F
27°C/80°F
31°C/87°F
DISABLE
Note
• Refer to “STATUS” of “PROJECTOR SETUP”.
(p. 81)
• Refer to “How to use network function” for details
on sending e-mail. (pp. 91-104)
The automatic setup function can be used to
automatically adjust the resolution, clock phase and
picture position when analog RGB signals consisting
of bitmap images such as computer signals are being
input, or to automatically adjust the picture position
when DVI-D signals are being input. (The automatic
setup function does not work with video format
signals such as signals output from a DVD player.)
It is recommended to supply images with a bright
white frame at the outermost periphery containing
characters etc. that are clear in white and black
contrast when the system is in automatic adjustment
mode. Avoid supplying images that involve halftones
or gradation such as photographs and computer
graphics.
1. Press AUTO SETUP on the
remote control or the main unit.
• A message “COMPLETE” appears if
adjustment is ended normally.
Note
• “CLOCK PHASE” may have been shifted even
when the adjustment ended normally. In this case,
manually adjust the “CLOCK PHASE”.
• If an image with blurred edges or a dark
image is input, “INCOMPLETE” may appear or
adjustment may not be performed properly even
if “COMPLETE” appears. In this case, manually
adjust the items of “INPUT RESOLUTION”,
“CLOCK PHASE” and “SHIFT”.
• For specific signals and landscape signals such
as 16:9, adjustment should be made according to
“AUTO SETUP” in the option menu.
• Automatic adjustment may not be available
depending on the machine type of the personal
computer.
• Automatic adjustment may not available for
synchronization signal of C-SYNC and G-SYNC.
• Image may be distorted for several seconds during
automatic adjustment. This is not a malfunction.
• For every supplied signal, adjustment is required.
• Automatic adjustment can be canceled by pressing
the MENU button during the course of automatic
adjustment.
• Even for an RGB signal for which automatic setup
is possible, if automatic setup is performed while
moving images are being input, “INCOMPLETE”
may appear, or adjustment may not be performed
properly even if “COMPLETE” appears.
Turning on button
illumination
Button illumination for the remote control can be
turned on.
1. Press LIGHT on the remote
control.
Note
• If no operations are carried out for approximately
10 seconds, button illumination will turn off
automatically.
Using the FUNC1 button
“DISABLE”, “P IN P” (pp. 85-86), “SUB MEMORY”
(pp. 46-47), “SYSTEM SELECTOR” (pp. 58-59),
“SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW” (pp. 56-57), or “FREEZE”
(p. 83) operations can be assigned to the FUNC1
button on the remote control so that it can be used as
an easy shortcut button.
Note
• Refer to “Setting FUNC1” for details. (p. 83)
Basic Operation
Automatic adjustment
(AUTO SETUP)
Displaying the internal
test pattern
The projector has eight types of internal test patterns
to check the condition of the set.
To display test patterns, follow the steps below.
1. Press TEST PATTERN.
2. Press ◄► to select “TEST
PATTERN”.
Note
• Setting is also possible by using an on-screen
menu. Refer to “Displaying the internal test pattern”
for details. (p. 87)
• Adjustment of the image, picture quality, position,
size and other factors will not be reflected in test
patterns. Be sure to display an actual input signal
before performing these adjustments.
ENGLISH – 49
Basic operations using the remote control (continued)
Changing the picture
aspect ratio
You can toggle through an appropriate set of aspect
ratios for a given input signal.
1. Press ASPECT on the remote
control.
• The setting will change as follows each time
ASPECT is pressed.
VID AUTO (PRI.)
DEFAULT
S1 AUTO
THROUGH
VID AUTO
16:9
HV FIT
4:3
V FIT
H FIT
Note
• Some aspect ratios may not be available for
selection depending on the input signal. Refer to
“Adjusting the aspect ratio” for details. (p. 61)
50 – ENGLISH
On-screen menus
MAIN MENU
The main menu consists of the following 11 menu
items. When a main menu item is selected, the screen
changes to a sub-menu selection screen.
Icon
MAIN MENU item
PICTURE
MENU
POSITION
▲▼◄►
ENTER
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
Basic Operation
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
DEFAULT
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
Menus are extensively used for configuring,
adjusting or reconfiguring the projector.
MENU
Press to display the MAIN
MENU screen.
Select the item to be set.
Press to display the menu
of the desired item.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
ENTER
SUB MENU
The sub-menu screen appears, and you can set and
adjust the various items in the sub-menu.
„ PICTURE (pp. 54-59)
PICTURE
PICTURE MODE
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
COLOR
TINT
COLOR TEMPERATURE
GAMMA
SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW
SHARPNESS
NOISE REDUCTION
DYNAMIC IRIS
SYSTEM SELECTOR
MENU SELECT
CHANGE
STANDARD
0
0
0
0
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
OFF
0
OFF
OFF
AUTO1
ENTER
REGISTER
Note
• The factory default values may vary depending on
the PICTURE menu.
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
• Some menu items may not be valid for certain
signal formats applied to the projector.
The menu items that cannot be adjusted or used
are shown in gray characters, and they cannot
be selected.
ENGLISH – 51
On-screen menus (continued)
„ POSITION (pp. 60-63)
POSITION
SHIFT
ASPECT
ZOOM
CLOCK PHASE
GEOMETORY
ENTER
„ PROJECTOR SETUP (pp. 77-84)
DEFAULT
0
OFF
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
„ ADVANCED MENU (pp. 64-68)
ADVANCED MENU
DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY
BLANKING
INPUT RESOLUTION
CLAMP POSITION
EDGE BLENDING
FRAME DELAY
RASTER POSITION
AUTO
OFF
DEFAULT
MENU SELECT
CHANGE
„
DISPLAY LANGUAGE (p. 69)
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
C ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
PROJECTOR SETUP
PROJECTOR ID
INSTALLATION
ALTITUDE MODE
DIRECTION
LAMP SELECT
LAMP RELAY
RS-232C
REMOTE2 MODE
STATUS
AIR FILTER CLEANING
AUTO POWER OFF
FUNC1
MENU SELECT
CHANGE
1/2
ALL
FRONT-FLOOR
ON
HORIZONTAL
QUAD
OFF
DEFAULT
DISABLE
PROJECTOR SETUP
DATE AND TIME
SAVE ALL USER DATA
LOAD ALL USER DATA
INITIALIZE
SERVICE PASSWORD
2/2
„ P IN P (pp. 85-86)
„ TEST PATTERN (p. 87)
„ SIGNAL LIST (pp. 45-47)
„ SECURITY (pp. 88-90)
SECURITY
SECURITY PASSWORD
SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE
DISPLAY SETTING
TEXT CHANGE
CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
OFF
OFF
日本語
中文
русский
MENU SELECT
CHANGE
한국어
ENTER
„
„ NETWORK (pp. 91-104)
SELECT
SET
DISPLAY OPTION (pp. 70-76)
DISPLAY OPTION
COLOR MATCHING
LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION
SCREEN SETTING
RGB IN
DVI-D IN
AUX DVI IN
AUX SDI IN
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
BACK COLOR
STARTUP LOGO
MENU SELECT
CHANGE
52 – ENGLISH
NETWORK
NETWORK
NETWORK
NETWORK
NETWORK
STANDBY
SETUP
CONTROL
STATUS
OFF
OFF
BLACK
LOGO3
MENU SELECT
CHANGE
OFF
Using the menu screens
1. Press MENU.
• The “MAIN MENU” appears on the screen.
• For some items, an individual adjustment
screen containing a bar scale will appear as
shown in the diagram below when ◄► is
pressed.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
ADJUST
• If no button is pressed for approx. 5 seconds
while the individual adjustment screen is
displayed, the screen will return to the previous
page.
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
2. Press ▲▼ to select the desired
item.
• The selected item is displayed with the colors
set by OSD DESIGN. (p. 75)
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
ENTER
• The submenu for the selected option will now
open.
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
• When the “MENU” is on the screen, pressing
the MENU button returns to the previous page.
• When the “MAIN MENU” is on the screen,
pressing MENU clears all menus from the
screen.
• The bottom prompt line differs on each menu
depending on the selected menu option:
• A prompt “◄► CHANGE” appears when
changing the setting.
• A prompt “◄► ADJUST” appears for a
separate bar graph.
• If there are more adjustments (items) available
for a menu item, a page number will appear at
the top-right of the screen.
3. Press ENTER to establish your
selection.
ENTER
„ Returning to the previous screen
„ Menu items setting
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
POSITION
SHIFT
ASPECT
ZOOM
CLOCK PHASE
GEOMETORY
0
CONTRAST
DEFAULT
0
OFF
Basic Operation
ENTER
4. Press ▲▼ button to highlight the
desired adjustment item, then
press ◄► to change or adjust
the parameter value.
Resetting to the factory
default
If an adjustment item is selected and DEFAULT
is pressed, the adjustment value will return to the
factory default setting.
1. Press DEFAULT.
PICTURE
PICTURE MODE
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
COLOR
TINT
COLOR TEMPERATURE
GAMMA
SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW
SHARPNESS
NOISE REDUCTION
DYNAMIC IRIS
SYSTEM SELECTOR
MENU SELECT
CHANGE
STANDARD
0
0
0
0
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
OFF
0
OFF
OFF
AUTO1
ENTER
REGISTER
ENGLISH – 53
Adjusting the picture
Switching the picture mode
The user can switch to the desired picture mode
suitable for the image source and the environment in
which this projector is used.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “PICTURE
MODE”.
MENU
▲▼◄►
ENTER
PICTURE
PICTURE MODE
CONTRAST
STANDARD
0
2. Press ◄► to switch “PICTURE
MODE”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
DEFAULT
You can adjust pictures to suit your preference.
MENU
Press to display the MAIN
MENU screen.
Press to select
“PICTURE”.
Press to display the
“PICTURE” menu.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
ENTER
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
• Some menu items may not be valid for certain
signal formats applied to the projector.
STANDARD
CINEMA
NATURAL
USER
GRAPHIC
DYNAMIC
• STANDARD:
The picture becomes suitable for moving images in
general.
• CINEMA:
The picture becomes suitable for movie sources.
• NATURAL:
The picture complies with sRGB.
• DYNAMIC:
The light output is maximized for use in bright
areas.
• GRAPHIC:
The picture becomes suitable for input from to the
personal computer.
• USER:
The COLOR TEMPERATURE and GAMMA settings
can be adjusted.
Note
• Factory defaults are “GRAPHIC” for RGB system
and “STANDARD” for moving images.
• When ENTER is pressed while “PICTURE MODE”
has been selected, the current Picture Mode page
settings are saved and will be used as the presets
when new signals are input. The data will be saved
for all items in the PICTURE menu except for the
SYSTEM SELECTOR setting.
Adjusting Contrast
Adjusts the Contrast (white level).
1. Press ▲▼ to select
“CONTRAST”.
PICTURE MODE
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
54 – ENGLISH
STANDARD
0
0
2. Press ◄► or ENTER.
2. Press ◄► or ENTER.
• The “CONTRAST” individual adjustment screen
will be displayed.
0
CONTRAST
0
COLOR
ADJUST
3. Press ◄► to adjust the level.
Operation
Adjustment
Adjustment
range
Press ►
button.
Raises the picture
Maximum value
brightness and the
31
picture becomes clearer.
Press ◄
button.
Lowers the picture
brightness and
weakens the picture.
Minimum value
-31
3. Press ◄► to adjust the level.
Operation
Adjustment
range
Adjustment
Press ►
button.
Deepens colors.
Maximum value
50
Press ◄
button.
Weakens colors.
Minimum value
-50
Adjusting Tint
This adjusts skin tones in the pictures.
Attention
• If you need to adjust the “BRIGHTNESS”, it should
be adjusted before other adjustments are made.
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusts the brightness (black level) of the picture.
1. Press ▲▼ to select
“BRIGHTNESS”.
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
COLOR
2. Press ◄► or ENTER.
0
ADJUST
3. Press ◄► to adjust the level.
Adjustment
Adjustment
range
Press ►
button.
Increases the
brightness of the dark
(black) parts of the
screen.
Press ◄
button.
Reduces the brightness
Minimum value
of the dark (black) parts
-31
of the screen.
Maximum value
31
Adjusting Color
• The “TINT” individual adjustment screen will be
displayed.
0
ADJUST
3. Press ◄► to adjust the level.
Adjustment
Adjustment
range
Press ►
button.
Adjusts skin tone
toward reddish-purple.
Maximum value
31
Press ◄
button.
Adjusts skin tone
toward greenish color.
Minimum value
-31
Adjusting the color
temperature
Used to set the projector’s white point. Three presets
and two user-definable modes are available. A
colorimeter should be used if available.
• Carry out this adjustment while the signals to be
adjusted are being projected.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “COLOR
TEMPERATURE”.
TINT
COLOR TEMPERATURE
GAMMA
This adjusts the depth of the colors.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “COLOR”.
BRIGHTNESS
COLOR
TINT
0
0
DEFAULT
2. Press ◄► or ENTER.
Operation
• The “BRIGHTNESS” individual adjustment
screen will be displayed.
Operation
COLOR
TINT
COLOR TEMPERATURE
TINT
0
0
0
BRIGHTNESS
1. Press ▲▼ to select “TINT”.
0
0
0
Basic Operation
ADJUST
• The “COLOR” individual adjustment screen will
be displayed.
0
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
2. Press ◄► or ENTER.
• The “COLOR TEMPERATURE” individual
adjustment screen will be displayed.
COLOR TEMPERATURE
DEFAULT
CHANGE
ENGLISH – 55
Adjusting the picture (continued)
3. Press ◄► to switch “COLOR
TEMPERATURE”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
DEFAULT
USER1
USER2
HIGH
MIDDLE
LOW
• When any setting other than “OFF” has been
selected for color matching, the COLOR
TEMPERATURE setting is fixed at “USER1”.
• “DEFAULT” cannot be selected when the picture
mode has been set to “USER”.
„ To further adjust toward the
desired white balance
4. Select “USER1” or “USER2” in
Step 3.
5. Press ENTER.
• The “WHITE BALANCE” screen will be
displayed.
• The “WHITE BALANCE HIGH” RGB settings
are used to set the projector’s white point color
temperature. The “WHITE BALANCE LOW”
RGB settings are used to adjust the color
temperature of the black levels.
WHITE BALANCE HIGH
RED
GREEN
255
255
GREEN
BLUE
Adjustment
Press ►
button.
Deepens red.
Press ◄
button.
Weakens red.
Press ►
button.
Deepens green.
Press ◄
button.
Weakens green.
Press ►
button.
Deepens blue.
Press ◄
button.
Weakens blue.
56 – ENGLISH
This switches the gamma mode.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “GAMMA”.
COLOR TEMPERATURE
GAMMA
SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW
DEFAULT
DEFAULT
OFF
2. Press ◄► or ENTER.
• The “GAMMA” individual adjustment screen
will be displayed.
DEFAULT
GAMMA
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
DEFAULT
USER1*
USER2*
2.6
2.5
2.2
* “USER1” and “USER2” can hold user-defined
gamma curves uploaded to the projector through
the RS-232 terminal.
Additional Gamma settings can be made available
for selection from a sub-menu.
Consult your dealer for more information.
Note
8. Press ▲▼ to select “RED”,
“GREEN” or “BLUE”.
9. Press ◄► to adjust the level.
RED
Gamma setting
3. Press ◄► to switch “GAMMA”.
6. Press ▲▼ to select “WHITE
BALANCE HIGH” or “WHITE
BALANCE LOW”.
7. Press ENTER.
Operation
• All colors will not be displayed properly unless
adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment
does not look suitable, you can press DEFAULT to
return the setting for the selected item only to the
factory default setting.
• The color temperature cannot be adjusted for the
internal test pattern (p. 87). Be sure to project the
input signal when adjusting the color temperature.
CHANGE
WHITE BALANCE
WHITE BALANCE HIGH
WHITE BALANCE LOW
Item
Note
• “DEFAULT” cannot be selected when the picture
mode has been set to “USER”.
System daylight view setting
Adjustment
range
This corrects images so that they appear vivid when
projected under bright lighting.
Maximum
value
HIGH : 255
LOW : 127
1. Press ▲▼ to select “SYSTEM
DAYLIGHT VIEW”.
Minimum
value
HIGH : 0
LOW : -127
Default
HIGH : 255
LOW : 0
GAMMA
SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW
SHARPNESS
DEFAULT
OFF
0
2. Press ◄► or ENTER.
• The “SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW” individual
adjustment screen will be displayed.
SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW
CHANGE
OFF
3. Press ◄► to switch “SYSTEM
DAYLIGHT VIEW”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
3. Press ◄► to switch “NOISE
REDUCTION”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
OFF (No correction)
1 (Low)
OFF (No correction)
1 (Low)
3 (High)
2 (Medium)
3 (High)
2 (Medium)
Note
Sharpness setting
• When “FRAME DELAY” is set to “SHORT”, the
noise reduction setting function cannot be used.
This adjusts the sharpness of the pictures.
1. Press ▲▼ to select
“SHARPNESS”.
OFF
0
OFF
2. Press ◄► or ENTER.
• The “SHARPNESS” individual adjustment
screen will be displayed.
0
SHARPNESS
3. Press ◄► to adjust the level.
Adjustment
Press ►
button.
Contours become
sharper.
Press ◄
button.
Contours become
softer.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “DYNAMIC
IRIS”.
NOISE REDUCTION
DYNAMIC IRIS
SYSTEM SELECTOR
ADJUST
Operation
Pictures with the optimum contrast will be displayed
by automatically providing aperture compensation
and signal compensation to suit the pictures
concerned.
Adjustment
range
OFF
OFF
AUTO1
2. Press ◄► or ENTER.
• The “DYNAMIC IRIS” individual adjustment
screen will be displayed.
OFF
DYNAMIC IRIS
0 to 15
Basic Operation
SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW
SHARPNESS
NOISE REDUCTION
Dynamic iris setting
CHANGE
3. Press ◄► to switch “DYNAMIC
IRIS”.
Note
• The possible setting range will vary depending on
the input signal.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
OFF (No correction)
1 (Low)
Noise reduction setting
This can be used to adjust pictures if they contain
interference as a result of poor quality of the input
signal.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “NOISE
REDUCTION”.
SHARPNESS
NOISE REDUCTION
DYNAMIC IRIS
0
OFF
OFF
2. Press ◄► or ENTER.
• The “NOISE REDUCTION” individual
adjustment screen will be displayed.
NOISE REDUCTION
CHANGE
OFF
USER
3 (High)
2 (Intermediate)
„ To further adjust the selected
compensation amount
4. Select “USER” in step 3.
5. Press ENTER.
• The “DYNAMIC IRIS” screen will be displayed.
DYNAMIC IRIS
AUTO IRIS
MANUAL IRIS
DYNAMIC GAMMA
OFF
OFF
OFF
6. Use ▲▼ to select the item to be
adjusted, and then use ◄► to
adjust the amount of correction.
ENGLISH – 57
Adjusting the picture (continued)
„ AUTO IRIS (Automatic aperture
adjustment)
OFF (No automatic
adjustment)
1 (Low)
3 (High)
2 (Intermediate)
„ MANUAL IRIS (Fixed aperture
adjustment)
OFF (No fixed iris)
1 (Low)
63 (High)
2…62 (Intermediate)
Setting the system selector
This enables the projector to automatically recognize
input signals. Furthermore, if unstable signals are
input, the system format can be selected manually.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “SYSTEM
SELECTOR”.
NOISE REDUCTION
DYNAMIC IRIS
SYSTEM SELECTOR
OFF
OFF
AUTO1
2. Press ENTER.
„ DYNAMIC GAMMA (signal
compensation amount
adjustment)
OFF (No automatic
correction)
1 (Low)
3 (High)
2 (Intermediate)
Note
• The contrast is set to the maximum level when
“DYNAMIC IRIS” is set to “3”.
Registering the picture mode
settings as presettings
• The “SYSTEM SELECTOR” screen will be
displayed.
SYSTEM SELECTOR
C AUTO1
AUTO2
3. Press ▲▼ to switch “SYSTEM
SELECTOR”, and then press
ENTER.
• The system formats that can be selected differ
depending on the input signals.
„ S-video / Video terminal input
signal
Select from AUTO1, AUTO2, NTSC, NTSC4.43,
PAL, PALM, PAL-N, SECAM, and PAL60.
Note
The picture settings that have been made in the
PICTURE MODE screen can be registered.
• Select “PICTURE MODE” in the “PICTURE” screen
to carry out this operation.
• Press the DEFAULT button to return to “AUTO1”.
• “AUTO1” automatically selects from NTSC,
PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, and PAL60. “AUTO2”
automatically selects from NTSC, PAL-M, and
PAL-N.
1. Press ENTER.
„ RGB1 / RGB2 / DVI-D terminal
• A confirmation screen will appear.
SAVE AS DEFAULT SETTING
FOR DYNAMIC?
OK
ENTER
Select from RGB and YPBPR.
CANCEL
CHANGE
EXECUTE
2. Press ◄► to select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER.
Note
• If the registered picture mode is selected after
registering the picture mode settings as presettings,
the new signals will be displayed with the registered
adjustments.
58 – ENGLISH
input signal
Note
• Refer to the types of signals compatible with the
projector. (pp. 122-123)
„ Input module
ET-MD77SD1:
Select from AUTO, 480i and 576i.
ET-MD77SD3:
Select from AUTO, 1 080/60i, 1 035/60i, 720/60p,
1 080/24p, 1 080/50i, 1 080/30p, 1 080/25p,
1 080/24sF, 720/50p, and 480i, 576i.
ET-MD100SD4:
When single link SDI signals
Select from AUTO YCbCr, 1 080/60i, 1 035/60i,
720/60p, 1 080/24p, 1 080/50i, 1 080/30p,
1 080/25p, 1 080/24sF, 720/50p, 480i, and 576i.
When dual link SDI signals
Select from AUTO RGB, AUTO X’Y’Z’,
1 920/24p/RGB, 2 048/24p/RGB, 2 048/24p/XYZ,
1 920/24sF/RGB, 2 048/24sF/RGB, 2 048/24sF/
XYZ, 1 920/25p/RGB, 1 920/30p/RGB, 1 920/50i/
RGB, and 1 920/60i/RGB.
7. Follow the same procedure
(steps 5-6) to restore the factory
default for “TINT”, “COLOR
TEMPERATURE” and “GAMMA”.
Note
• sRGB is only enable when RGB signals are being
input.
• Press the DEFAULT button to return to AUTO
YCbCr or AUTO RGB.
• “AUTO RGB” automatically selects from 1 920/24p/
RGB, 2 048/24p/RGB, 1 920/24sF/RGB,
2 048/24sF/RGB, 1 920/25p/RGB, 1 920/30p/RGB,
1 920/50i/RGB, and 1 920/60i/RGB. “AUTO X’Y’Z’”
automatically selects from 2 048/24p/XYZ and
2 048/24sF/XYZ.
To display pictures complying
with the sRGB standard
sRGB is the international color reproduction standard
(IEC61966-2-1) established by IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission).
To reproduce colors more faithfully in compliance
with the sRGB standard, perform the following setting
procedure.
Basic Operation
Note
1. Set “COLOR MATCHING”
adjustment to “OFF”. (p. 70)
2. Display the “PICTURE” screen.
(p. 54)
3. Press ▲▼ to select “PICTURE
MODE”.
PICTURE
PICTURE MODE
CONTRAST
NATURAL
0
4. Press ◄► to select “NATURAL”.
5. Press ▲▼ to select “COLOR”.
BRIGHTNESS
COLOR
TINT
0
0
0
6. Press DEFAULT on the remote
control to restore the factory
default.
ENGLISH – 59
Adjusting the position
Shift adjustment
This function allows the user to adjust the raster
position vertically or horizontally if the position of
the image projected on the screen is displaced
even when the projector is properly aligned with the
screen, and the internal test patterns are correctly
framed.
MENU
1. Press ▲▼ to select “SHIFT”.
▲▼◄►
ENTER
POSITION
SHIFT
ASPECT
DEFAULT
2. Press ENTER.
• The “SHIFT” screen will be displayed.
SHIFT
V
H
DEFAULT
12
212
3. Press ▲▼◄► to adjust the
position.
„ For horizontal (right and left)
adjustment
Operation
You can adjust the position as required.
MENU
Press to display the MAIN
MENU screen.
Press to select
“POSITION”.
Press to display the
“POSITION” menu.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
ENTER
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
Adjustment
The picture
Press ► button. position moves
to the right.
The picture
Press ◄ button. position moves
to the left.
„ For vertical (up and down)
adjustment
Operation
Adjustment
The picture
Press ▲ button. position moves
up.
The picture
Press ▼ button. position moves
down.
4. Press MENU three times.
• The on-screen indications disappear and the
normal screen appears again.
60 – ENGLISH
This changes the aspect ratio of the projected image.
This changes the aspect ratio for the screen range
selected with “SCREEN SETTING”. Set “SCREEN
SETTING” first. (p. 72)
1. Press ▲▼ to select “ASPECT”.
SHIFT
ASPECT
ZOOM
DEFAULT
2. Press ◄► or ENTER.
• The “ASPECT” individual adjustment screen
will be displayed.
DEFAULT
ASPECT
CHANGE
3. Press ◄► to switch “ASPECT”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
VID AUTO (PRI.)
DEFAULT
S1 AUTO
THROUGH
VID AUTO
16:9
HV FIT
4:3
V FIT
H FIT
• DEFAULT:
Pictures are displayed without changing the aspect
ratio of the input signals.
• THROUGH:
Pictures are displayed without changing the
resolution of the input signals.
• 16:9:
When standard signals*1 are input, the pictures are
displayed with the aspect ratio converted to 16:9.
When wide signals are input*2, the pictures are
displayed without changing the aspect ratio.
• 4:3:
When standard signals are input*1, the pictures are
displayed without changing the aspect ratio. When
wide signals are input*2, the PT-D12000U displays
pictures with the aspect ratio converted to 4:3. The
PT-DZ12000U displays pictures reduced to fit a 4:3
screen without changing the input aspect ratio.
• H FIT:
The display will use the full width of the screen
range selected with “SCREEN SETTING”. When
signals have a vertical aspect ratio that is larger
than the screen aspect selected with “SCREEN
SETTING”, the pictures will be displayed with their
bottom areas cut off.
• V FIT:
The display will use the full height of the screen
range selected with “SCREEN SETTING”.
• HV FIT:
The pictures are displayed in the full screen range
selected with “SCREEN SETTING”. If the aspect
ratios of the input signals and screen range differ,
conversion to the screen aspect set with “SCREEN
SETTING” is performed and then the pictures are
displayed.
• VID AUTO:
The projector identifies the video ID (VID)
embedded in the picture signals and displays the
picture by automatically switching the screen sizes
between 4:3 and 16:9. This function is effective for
the NTSC signal input.
• S1 AUTO:
The projector identifies the S1 signal and displays
the picture by automatically switching the screen
sizes between 4:3 and 16:9. This function is
effective for S-Video NTSC signals.
• VID AUTO (PRI.):
The projector identifies the abovementioned VID or
S1 signals and displays the picture by automatically
choosing the screen sizes of 4:3 or 16:9 according
to the VID if it is detected or S1 signals if a VID is
not detected. This function is effective for S-Video
NTSC signals.
*1: Standard signals are input signals with an aspect
ratio of 4:3 or 5:4.
*2: Wide-screen signals are input signals with an
aspect ratio of 16:10, 16:9, 15:9 or 15:10.
Basic Operation
Adjusting the aspect ratio
Note
• Some size modes are not available for certain types
of input signals. For NTSC signals, “DEFAULT”
cannot be selected.
• If an aspect ratio which is different from the aspect
ratio for the input signals is selected, the pictures
will appear differently from the originals. Be careful
of this when selecting the aspect ratio.
• If using this projector in places such as cafes or
hotels to display programmes for a commercial
purpose or for public presentation, note that
adjusting the aspect ratio or using the zoom
function to change the screen pictures may be an
infringement of the rights of the original copyright
owner for that programme under copyright
protection laws.
• If conventional (normal) 4:3 pictures which are
not wide-screen pictures are displayed on a wide
screen, the edges of the pictures may not be visible
or they may become distorted. Such pictures
should be viewed as with an aspect ratio of 4:3 in
the original format intended by the creator of the
pictures.
ENGLISH – 61
Adjusting the position (continued)
Adjusting the zoom ratio
This adjusts the size of the projected pictures.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “ZOOM”.
ASPECT
ZOOM
CLOCK PHASE
DEFAULT
Clock phase adjustment
• The “ZOOM” screen will be displayed.
INTERNAL
OFF
100%
100%
100%
3. Press ▲▼ to select “MODE”.
4. Press ◄► to switch “MODE”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
INTERNAL
• When “ASPECT” is set to “THROUGH”, “ZOOM”
will not appear.
• When other than “DEFAULT” is selected for
“ASPECT”, the “MODE” selection setting will not
appear.
0
2. Press ENTER.
ZOOM
MODE
INTERLOCKED
V
H
HV
Note
FULL
Clock phase adjustment achieves the best image
when the screen flickers or halos are observed
around contours.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “CLOCK
PHASE”.
ZOOM
CLOCK PHASE
GEOMETORY
0
OFF
2. Press ◄► or ENTER.
• The “CLOCK PHASE” individual adjustment
screen will be displayed.
CLOCK PHASE
0
ADJUST
• INTERNAL:
Enlarges the size of the pictures to within the
default aspect ratio.
• FULL:
Enlarges the size of the pictures using the whole of
the display area selected with “SCREEN FORMAT”.
5. Press ▲▼ to select
“INTERLOCKED”.
ZOOM
MODE
INTERLOCKED
V
H
HV
INTERNAL
OFF
100%
100%
100%
6. Press ◄► to switch
“INTERLOCKED”.
ON
• OFF :
The “V” and “H” settings are used as the vertical
and horizontal zoom ratios respectively.
• ON :
The zoom ratio is set to the “HV” setting. This
allows the pictures to be zoomed at equal vertical
and horizontal ratios.
62 – ENGLISH
• The value changes from 0 to 31. Adjust so that
the amount of interference is at a minimum.
Note
• No optimal value may be obtained if the output
of the PC to which the signal input is applied is
unstable.
• No optimal value may be obtained if the total
number of dots is not correct.
• The clock phase can be adjusted only when RGB
signal input is applied with RGB1 and RGB2 IN.
Adjusting the geometry
Square video can be projected onto a special shaped
screen using unique image processing technology.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
OFF
3. Press ◄► to adjust the level.
1. Press ▲▼ to select
“GEOMETRY”.
ZOOM
CLOCK PHASE
GEOMETRY
0
OFF
2. Press ◄► to switch
“GEOMETRY”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
OFF
KEYSTONE
PC
CURVED
• OFF:
Geometry correction is not performed.
• KEYSTONE:
This adjusts projected images when they are
distorted to a trapezoid.
• CURVED:
This adjusts projected images when they are
distorted to a curved surface.
• PC:
This is for performing geometry correction from a PC.
3. Select “KEYSTONE” or
“CURVED” in Step 2, and then
press ENTER.
• LINEARITY
CURVED menu:
• LENS THROW RATIO
Set to the throw ratio being used (the
projection distance divided by the screen
width). (pp. 22-24)
• VERTICAL KEYSTONE
• HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE
GEOMETRY:KEYSTONE
VERTICAL KEYSTONE
VERTICAL SUB KEYSTONE
0
0
GEOMETRY:CURVED
LENS THROW RATIO
VERTICAL KEYSTONE
0
0
4. Press ▲▼ to select the desired
adjustment item, and press ◄►
to adjust the correction amount.
• You can adjust the projection images as shown
below.
KEYSTONE menu:
• VERTICAL KEYSTONE
• VERTICAL SUB KEYSTONE
• HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE
• HORIZONTAL SUB KEYSTONE
Basic Operation
• The “GEOMETRY:KEYSTONE” or
“GEOMETRY:CURVED” screen will be
displayed.
• VERTICAL ARC
• HORIZONTAL ARC
• VERTICAL BALANCE
• HORIZONTAL BALANCE
Note
• If vertical keystone correction is set, menus and logos
may be projected outside of the actual image area.
• If both edge blending adjustment and geometry
correction are used, set the geometry correction
to curved-surface correction or PC. If geometry
correction is set to keystone-distortion correction,
edge blending adjustment cannot be made
correctly. (p. 66)
ENGLISH – 63
How to use ADVANCED MENU
Digital cinema reality
Increase the vertical resolution when the PAL (or
SECAM) 576i signal input or the NTSC 480i, 1 080/50i
and 1 080/60i signal input is applied.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “DIGITAL
CINEMA REALITY”.
MENU
▲▼◄►
ENTER
ADVANCED MENU
DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY
BLANKING
AUTO
2. Press ◄► or ENTER.
• The “DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY” individual
adjustment screen will be displayed.
DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY
AUTO
CHANGE
3. Press ◄► to switch “DIGITAL
CINEMA REALITY”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
AUTO
OFF
30p FIXED: When 480i or 1 080/60i signals are input
25p FIXED: When 576i or 1 080/50i signals are input
Fine settings are possible.
MENU
Press to display the MAIN
MENU screen.
Press to select
“ADVANCED MENU”.
Press to display the
“ADVANCED MENU”
menu.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
ENTER
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
• AUTO:
Performs automatic detection and cinema
processing. (factory default)
• OFF:
Unforced cinema processing
• 25p FIXED:
Forced cinema processing (2:2 pulldown) is
performed when a 576i or 1 080/50i signal is input.
• 30p FIXED:
Forced cinema processing (2:2 pulldown) is
performed when a 480i or 1 080/60i signal is input.
Note
• In DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY mode, the image
quality will be deteriorated if 30p FIXED or 25p
FIXED is selected when the signal is not a 2:2
pulldown signal.
Blanking adjustment
Blanking adjustment fine-tunes the images projected
by the video deck or other devices when the noise
appears on the edges of the screen or if a part of the
image lies slightly offscreen.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “BLANKING”.
DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY
BLANKING
INPUT RESOLUTION
64 – ENGLISH
AUTO
• The “BLANKING” adjustment screen will be
displayed.
BLANKING
UPPER
LOWER
0
0
3. Press ▲▼ to select the desired
item for adjustment.
4. Press ◄► to adjust blanking.
• The adjustment value for the PT-D12000U can
be changed within a range of 0 to 525 vertically
and 0 to 700 horizontally.
• The adjustment value for the PT-DZ12000U can
be changed within a range of 0 to 600 vertically
and 0 to 960 horizontally.
When correcting the upper blanking of the
screen (top)
Press ◄ button to
move the blanking zone
upward; ► button to
downward.
When correcting the lower blanking of the
screen (bottom)
Press ► button to
move the blanking zone
upward; ◄ button to
downward.
When correcting the left hand blanking of
the screen (left)
Press ► button to move
the blanking zone to the
right; ◄ button to the
left.
When correcting the right hand blanking of
the screen (right)
Press ◄ button to move
the blanking zone to the
right; ► button to the
left.
Adjusting the input
resolution
Input resolution adjustment achieves the best image
when the screen flickers or halo is observed around
the contour. Set the values appropriately for the signal
resolution that is being used.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “INPUT
RESOLUTION”.
BLANKING
INPUT RESOLUTION
CLAMP POSITION
2. Press ENTER.
• The “INPUT RESOLUTION” screen will be
displayed.
INPUT RESOLUTION
TOTAL DOTS
DISPLAY DOTS
1344
1024
3. Press ▲▼ to select “TOTAL
DOTS”, “DISPLAY DOTS”,
“TOTAL LINES” or “DISPLAY
LINES”, and the press ◄► to
adjust it.
Basic Operation
2. Press ENTER.
• Each item automatically displays a value in
response to the type of the input signal. If
vertical stripes appear on the screen or the
image is partly missing, increase or decrease
the displayed value while observing the screen
to achieve the optimal value.
Note
• The abovementioned vertical stripes will not appear
on the screen when all signals are input.
• The picture may be distorted during the adjusting
operation, but this is not a fault.
• The input resolution can be adjusted only when
RGB signal input is applied with RGB1 and RGB2
IN.
Adjusting the clamp
position
Use the clamp position adjustment to achieve the
optimal value when dark areas of the image are
crushed or displayed in green.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “CLAMP
POSITION”.
INPUT RESOLUTION
CLAMP POSITION
EDGE BLENDING
OFF
ENGLISH – 65
How to use ADVANCED MENU (continued)
2. Press ENTER.
• The “CLAMP POSITION” screen will be
displayed.
CLAMP POSITION
POSITION
ADJUST
1
3. Press ◄► to adjust.
• The value changes from 0 to 255.
• The optimal value for the clamp position
adjustment
If dark areas are crushed:
The optimal value is the point where the dark
area is best improved.
If the dark areas are displayed in green:
The optimal value is the point where the green
areas become black and the crushing effect is
rectified.
Note
• The clamp position can be adjusted only when the
RGB signal input is applied with RGB1 and RGB2 IN.
Edge blending adjustment
The built-in edge blending feature allows multiple
projector images to be seamlessly overlapped.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “EDGE
BLENDING”.
CLAMP POSITION
EDGE BLENDING
FRAME DELAY
OFF
DEFAULT
4. Press ▲▼ to specify the area to
be adjusted.
•
•
•
•
To blend the top edge: set “UPPER” to “ON”.
To blend he bottom edge: set “LOWER” to “ON”.
To blend the left edge: set “LEFT” to “ON”.
To blend the right edge: set “RIGHT” to “ON”.
5. Press ◄► to toggle “ON” and
“OFF”.
6. Press ◄► to adjust the overlap
width and the starting point.
„ To display the adjustment
marker
7. Press ▲▼ to select “MARKER”.
RIGHT
MARKER
BRIGHT ADJUST
OFF
OFF
8. Press ◄► to select “ON”.
• A marker for adjusting the overlap position
appears. The optimal point is the position
where the red line of one frame overlaps the
green line of the other frame.
The blending widths of each projector must be
set to the same value. Optimal blending cannot
be achieved if the widths are different.
The optimal point is where
these lines overlap.
2. Press ◄► to switch “EDGE
BLENDING”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
OFF
ON
USER
• OFF:
When the multi-screens are not going to be used.
• ON:
When the default linear blending ramps are
sufficient.
• USER:
When a user-defined blending ramp is required.
These ramps can be defined and uploaded to the
projector through the RS-232 port. Consult your
dealer for details.
3. Press ENTER.
• The “EDGE BLENDING” screen will be
displayed.
EDGE BLENDING
UPPER
START
66 – ENGLISH
ON
0
Green line
Red line
9. Press ▲▼ to select “BRIGHT
ADJUST”.
RIGHT
MARKER
BRIGHT ADJUST
OFF
OFF
10. Press ENTER.
• The “BRIGHT ADJUST” screen will be
displayed.
BRIGHT ADJUST
BRIGHT INSIDE
BRIGHT OUTSIDE
18. Press ▲▼ to select an item, and
press ◄► to adjust the setting.
Projection Edge blending width (right)
range
BRIGHT adjustment
(right)
11. Press ▲▼ to select “BRIGHT
INSIDE”.
Marker
12. Press ENTER.
• The “BRIGHT INSIDE” adjustment screen will
be displayed.
ON
0
0
0
0
BRIGHT OUTSIDE
BRIGHT INSIDE
• When “INTERLOCKED” is set to “OFF”,
individual adjustment of “RED”, “GREEN” and
“BLUE” will be possible.
13. Press ▲▼ to select an item, and
press ◄► to adjust the setting.
• Once adjustment is complete, press MENU to
return to “BRIGHT ADJUST”.
14. Press ▲▼ to select the part of
“UPPER”, “LOWER”, “RIGHT”,
“LEFT”.
15. Use ◄► to adjust the width for
correcting the “BRIGHT INSIDE”
setting (0 to 255).
16. Press ▲▼ to select “BRIGHT
OUTSIDE”.
BRIGHT INSIDE
BRIGHT OUTSIDE
OUTSIDE AREA
Note
• The Bright Inside adjustments are used to match
the projector’s main-screen-area black levels to the
level within the blended area. The Bright Outside
adjustments may be used to fine adjust the thin
borders on either side of the blend area, but are
often not needed.
• When a rear screen or screen with a high gain
is used, the blended areas may appear to be
discontinuous depending on the viewing position.
Basic Operation
BRIGHT INSIDE
INTERLOCKED
WHITE
RED
GREEN
BLUE
Frame delay
When 1 080/60i, 1 080/50i and 1 080/24sF signals are
being input, this simplifies image processing so that
the video frame delay is shortened.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “FRAME
DELAY”.
EDGE BLENDING
FRAME DELAY
RASTER POSITION
OFF
DEFAULT
17. Press ENTER.
• The “BRIGHT OUTSIDE” adjustment screen will
be displayed.
BRIGHT OUTSIDE
INTERLOCKED
WHITE
RED
GREEN
BLUE
ON
0
0
0
0
• When “INTERLOCKED” is set to “OFF”,
individual adjustment of “RED”, “GREEN” and
“BLUE” will be possible.
ENGLISH – 67
How to use ADVANCED MENU (continued)
2. Press ◄► to switch “FRAME
DELAY”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
DEFAULT
SHORT
• DEFAULT:
This is the standard setting.
• SHORT:
Shortens the delay at the expense of some picture
quality.
Note
• When “FRAME DELAY” is set to “SHORT”,
deterioration in the picture quality will occur.
Furthermore, the noise reduction function cannot be
used.
When 16:9 pictures are displayed
(when HDTV or 480p pictures are input or
16:9 is selected in the SIZE mode)
Pressing ▲ button will move
the image upward.
Pressing ▼ button will move
the image downward.
„ PT-DZ12000U
When 4:3 pictures are displayed
Pressing ► button will move
the image to the right.
Raster position
When the scaler is set such that the image is smaller
than the display area, the image can be moved to any
position inside the display area.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “RASTER
POSITION”.
EDGE BLENDING
FRAME DELAY
RASTER POSITION
OFF
DEFAULT
2. Press ENTER.
• The “RASTER POSITION” screen will be
displayed.
RASTER POSITION
V
H
0
0
3. Press ▲▼◄► to adjust the
position.
„ PT-D12000U
When 5:4 pictures are displayed
(when SXGA signals are input)
Pressing ► button will move
the image to the right.
Pressing ◄ button will move
the image to the left.
68 – ENGLISH
Pressing ◄ button will move
the image to the left.
4. Press MENU three times.
• The on-screen indications disappear and the
normal screen appears again.
Setting the DISPLAY LANGUAGE
Changing the display
language
This lets you switch the on-screen display language.
1. Press ▲▼ to select the desired
language.
MENU
▲▼◄►
ENTER
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
C ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
FRANÇAIS
ESPAÑOL
ITALIANO
日本語
中文
한국어
2. Press ENTER to establish your
selection.
• Menus, setting items, adjustment screens, and
control button names will be displayed in the
language the user chooses.
• The available languages are: English, German
(DEUTSCH), French (FRANÇAIS), Spanish
(ESPAÑOL), Italian (ITALIANO), Japanese (日本
語), Chinese (中文), Russian (русский),
and Korean (한국어).
This lets you switch the display language.
MENU
Press to display the MAIN
MENU screen.
Basic Operation
русский
Note
• The on-screen display of the projector is set to the
English language on shipping.
Press to select
“DISPLAY LANGUAGE”.
Press to display the
“DISPLAY LANGUAGE”
menu.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
ENTER
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
ENGLISH – 69
Display Option settings
Adjusting color matching
When multiple sets are used simultaneously, this
projector allows the user to correct the difference of
colors among the sets.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “COLOR
MATCHING”.
MENU
▲▼◄►
ENTER
DISPLAY OPTION
COLOR MATCHING
LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION
OFF
OFF
2. Press ◄► to switch “COLOR
MATCHING”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
OFF
3COLORS
MEASURED
DEFAULT
This menu can be used to make a variety of
picture and projector settings.
MENU
Press to display the MAIN
MENU screen.
Press to select
“DISPLAY OPTION”.
Press to display the
“DISPLAY OPTION” menu.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
ENTER
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
70 – ENGLISH
7COLORS
709MODE
• OFF:
Color matching adjustment is not carried out.
• 3COLORS:
It is possible to adjust the 3colors of “RED”,
“GREEN” and “BLUE”.
• 7COLORS:
It is possible to adjust the 7colors of “RED”,
“GREEN”, “BLUE”, “CYAN”, “MAGENTA”,
“YELLOW” and “WHITE”.
• 709MODE:
Refer to “Adjusting the color matching using a
colorimeter” on the next page for details on this
mode.
• MEASURED:
Refer to “Adjusting the color matching using a
colorimeter” on the next page for details on this
mode.
„ If “3COLORS” or “7COLORS”
was selected in step 2.
3. Press ENTER.
• The “3COLORS” or “7COLORS” screen will be
displayed.
3COLORS
RED
GREEN
BLUE
AUTO TESTPATTERN
ON
4. Press ▲▼ to select “RED”,
“GREEN” and “BLUE” (if
“7COLORS” was selected,
select “RED”, “GREEN”,
“BLUE”, “CYAN”, “MAGENTA”,
“YELLOW”, and “WHITE”).
5. Press ENTER.
3. Press ENTER.
3COLORS:RED
RED
GREEN
BLUE
2048
0
0
6. Press ◄► to adjust the values.
• These values can be adjusted from 0 (off) to
2 048 (full gain). The color value being adjusted
is added or subtracted from the adjustment
color listed at the top of the menu (e.g.
3COLORS: RED)
Note
• The effects of correcting the adjustment color:
When tuning the correction color that is the same
as the adjustment color: the brightness of the
adjustment color changes.
RED: RED is added to or reduced from the
adjustment color.
GREEN: GREEN is added to or reduced from the
adjustment color.
BLUE: BLUE is added to or reduced from the
adjustment color.
• This adjustment should be carried out by a person
who is familiar with the projector or by a service
person because a high level of skill is required to
make successful adjustment.
• Pressing DEFAULT will restore the factory defaults
for all items.
• When any setting other than “OFF” has been
selected for color matching, the “COLOR
TEMPERATURE” setting is fixed at “USER1”.
Adjusting the color matching
using a colorimeter
The “RED”, “GREEN”, “BLUE”, “CYAN”, “MAGENTA”,
“YELLOW” and “WHITE” colors can be changed to the
desired hues using a colorimeter which is capable of
measuring the chromaticity coordinates and luminance.
„
Inputting the current luminance
and chromaticity coordinates
1. Press ▲▼ to select “COLOR
MATCHING”.
DISPLAY OPTION
COLOR MATCHING
LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION
• The “MEASURED MODE” screen will be displayed.
MEASURED MODE
MEASURED DATA
TARGET DATA
AUTO TESTPATTERN
4. Press ▲▼ to select “MEASURED
DATA”.
5. Press ENTER.
• The “MEASURED DATA” screen will be displayed.
MEASURED DATA
BLACK
Y(RELATIVE)
x
y
RED
Y(RELATIVE)
x
y
GREEN
Y(RELATIVE)
x
y
BLUE
Y(RELATIVE)
x
y
2. Press ◄► to select
“MEASURED” or “709MODE”.
1/2
1
0.35
0.36
1400
0.67
0.33
5099
0.35
0.63
500
0.15
0.05
6. Use the colorimeter to
measure the luminance (Y) and
chromaticity coordinates (x, y) (If
the projector is new, these values
will not need to be changed).
7. Press ▲▼ to select the colors, and
press ◄► to select their values.
8. After all the data has been input,
press MENU.
• The “MEASURED MODE” screen will be displayed.
MEASURED MODE
MEASURED DATA
TARGET DATA
AUTO TESTPATTERN
ON
„ Inputting the coordinates of a
desired color (only “MEASURED”)
9. Press ▲▼ to select “TARGET
DATA”.
10. Press ENTER.
• The “TARGET DATA” screen will be displayed.
TARGET DATA
RED
GREEN
BLUE
CYAN
OFF
OFF
ON
Special Features
• The “3COLORS:RED”, “3COLORS:GREEN” or
“3COLORS:BLUE” screen will be displayed.
If you selected “7COLORS”, the
“7COLORS:RED”, “7COLORS:GREEN”,
“7COLORS:BLUE”, “7COLORS:CYAN”,
“7COLORS:MAGENTA”, “7COLORS:YELLOW”,
or “7COLORS:WHITE” screen will be displayed.
MAGENTA
YELLOW
1/2
x
y
x
y
x
y
x
y
x
y
x
y
0.64
0.33
0.3
0.6
0.15
0.6
0.225
0.329
0.321
0.154
0.419
0.505
ENGLISH – 71
Display Option settings (continued)
11. Press ▲▼ to select the desired
colors, and press ◄► to input
their coordinates. The effects
can be confirmed on the
colorimeter.
2. Press ENTER.
12. After all the data has been input,
press MENU.
3. Press ◄► to switch “SCREEN
FORMAT”.
• The “SCREEN SETTING” screen will be
displayed.
SCREEN SETTING
SCREEN FORMAT
SCREEN POSITION
16:9
0
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
Note
• If “709MODE” has been selected as the “COLOR
MATCHING” setting, the 3 primary colors defined
by the ITU-R BT.709 standard will be set as the
target data.
• If the target data is outside the color range of the
projector, the colors will not be projected correctly.
Large Screen Correction
When viewing images close up on a large screen,
you can correct the colors that appear lighter on the
screen so that they appear the same as the colors
that would appear on a normal-sized screen.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “LARGE
SCREEN CORRECTION”.
COLOR MATCHING
LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION
SCREEN SETTING
OFF
OFF
2. Press ◄► to switch “LARGE
SCREEN CORRECTION”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
OFF (No correction)
1 (Low)
2 (High)
Screen setting
Set this in accordance with the screen you are using.
When the projection image aspect ratio is changed,
the projector makes corrections to ensure the optimal
images for the set screen size.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “SCREEN
SETTING”.
LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION
SCREEN SETTING
RGB IN
OFF
„ PT-DZ12000U
16:10
16:9
„ PT-D12000U
4:3
16:9
4. Press ◄► to adjust “SCREEN
POSITION”.
• In the case of the PT-DZ12000U, you can
adjust the setting from -60 to +60. This allows
a 16:9 image to be moved up and down within
the 16:10 screen.
• In the case of the PT-D12000U, you can adjust
the setting from -132 to +131.
Note
• “SCREEN POSITION” cannot be adjusted when
“SCREEN FORMAT” is “16:10” (PT-DZ12000U) and
“4:3” (PT-D12000U).
RGB IN (Only RGB input)
When unregistered signals are to be input frequently
because the unit is used at conferences or other
venues, the screen display position can be adjusted
automatically without having to press AUTO SETUP
on the remote control each time.
Use this setting when adjusting a specific or oblong
(16:9, etc.) signal.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “RGB IN”.
SCREEN SETTING
RGB IN
DVI-D IN
2. Press ENTER.
• The “RGB IN” screen will be displayed.
RGB IN
AUTO SIGNAL
AUTO SETUP
„ AUTO SIGNAL
OFF
3. Press ▲▼ to select “AUTO
SIGNAL”.
72 – ENGLISH
4. Press ◄► to switch “AUTO
SIGNAL”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
OFF
ON
• If unregistered signals are input when “ON”
is selected, auto setup will be initiated
automatically.
„ AUTO SETUP
DVI-D IN
Change this setting if video does not display normally
when the projector and an external device are
connected via DVI-D.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “DVI-D IN”.
RGB IN
DVI-D IN
AUX DVI IN
2. Press ENTER.
• The “DVI-D IN” screen will be displayed.
5. Press ▲▼ to select “AUTO
SETUP”.
6. Press ENTER.
• The “AUTO SETUP” screen will be displayed.
AUTO SETUP
MODE
DVI-D IN
DVI EDID
DVI SIGNAL LEVEL
EDID1
0-255:PC
3. Press ◄► to switch “DVI EDID”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
EDID1
DEFAULT
EDID2(PC)
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
DEFAULT
WIDE
USER
• DEFAULT:
To receive signals of which image aspect is
4:3 or 5:4 (applicable resolution : 640 × 400,
640 × 480, 800 × 600, 832 × 624, 960 × 720,
1 024 × 768, 1 152 × 864, 1 152 × 870, 1 280 × 960,
1 280 × 1 024, 1 600 × 1 200, 1 400 × 1 050)
• WIDE:
To receive signals of which the image aspect is
wide (applicable resolution: 720 x 400, 848 x 480,
1 280 x 720, 1 024 x 600, 1 120 x 750, 1 440 x 900,
1 680 x 1 050)
• USER:
To receive signals of specific horizontal resolution
(number of horizontally displayed dots)
8. If “User” is selected, press ◄►
to enter the horizontal resolution
of signal source into “DISPLAY
DOTS”.
9. Press ENTER.
• Execute automatic adjustment. A message
“PROGRESS...” appears during automatic
adjustment. When the adjustment is complete,
the system returns to the input screen.
• EDID1 (Input signal formats supported) :
Mainly select this when an external device (DVD
player, etc.) for outputting video signals of a moving
image system is connected to DVI-D IN.
• EDID2 (Input signal formats supported) :
Mainly use this when an external device (PC, etc.)
for outputting video signals of a still image system
is connected to DVI-D IN.
4. Press ◄► to switch “DVI
SIGNAL LEVEL”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
0-255:PC
16-235
• 0-255:PC:
Select this when, for example, an external device
(PC, etc.) is connected via the DVI terminal output.
• 16-235:
Select this when, for example, an external device
(DVD player, etc.) is connected via the HDMI
terminal output using a conversion cable.
Special Features
7. Press ◄► to switch “MODE”.
Note
• The optimal setting differs depending on the output
setting of the connected external device. Refer to
the instruction manual of the external device.
• If the setting is changed, the data for plug and
play changes. For the plug and play compatible
resolutions, check the compatible signal list
(pp. 122-123).
ENGLISH – 73
Display Option settings (continued)
AUX DVI IN (Only when the
ET-MD77DV is installed)
Change this setting if video does not display normally
when the ET-MD77DV and an external device are
connected via DVI-D.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “AUX DVI IN”.
DVI-D IN
AUX DVI IN
AUX SDI IN
EDID1
0-255:PC
3. Press ◄► to switch “AUX DVI
EDID”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
EDID2(PC)
• EDID1 (Input signal formats supported) :
Mainly select this when an external device (DVD
player, etc.) for outputting video signals of a moving
image system is connected to AUX DVI IN.
• EDID2 (Input signal formats supported) :
Mainly use this when an external device (PC, etc.)
for outputting video signals of a still image system
is connected to AUX DVI IN.
4. Press ◄► to switch “AUX DVI
SIGNAL LEVEL”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
0-255:PC
1. Press ▲▼ to select “AUX SDI
IN”.
AUX DVI IN
AUX SDI IN
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
• The “AUX SDI IN” screen will be displayed.
• The “AUX DVI IN” screen will be displayed.
EDID1
Set this in accordance with the input module (sold
separately).
2. Press ENTER.
2. Press ENTER.
AUX DVI IN
AUX DVI EDID
AUX DVI SIGNAL LEVEL
AUX SDI IN
16-235
AUX
SDI
BIT
SDI
SDI IN
LINK
DEPTH(DUAL LINK)
SIGNAL LEVEL
AUTO
AUTO
64-940
3. Press ▲▼ to select the desired
item, and press ◄► to change
the setting.
z SDI LINK
Select the single link signal type or dual link signal
type. The setting will change as follows each time
the button is pressed.
AUTO
SINGLE LINK
DUAL LINK
• AUTO:
Selects the setting automatically.
• SINGLE LINK:
Fixes the setting to signal link signal.
• DUAL LINK:
Fixes the setting to dual link signal.
z BIT DEPTH (DUAL LINK)
Select the gradation for the signals to be input.
This is only valid for dual link RGB inputs. The
setting will change as follows each time the button
is pressed.
AUTO
• 0-255:PC :
Select this when, for example, an external device
(PC, etc.) is connected via the DVI terminal output.
• 16-235 :
Select this when, for example, an external device
(DVD player, etc.) is connected via the HDMI
terminal output using a conversion cable.
Note
• The optimal setting differs depending on the output
setting of the connected external device. Refer to
the instruction manual of the external device.
• If the setting is changed, the data for plug and
play changes. For the plug and play compatible
resolutions, check the compatible signal list
(pp. 122-123).
74 – ENGLISH
12-bit
10-bit
• AUTO:
Selects 12-bit or 10-bit automatically.
• 12-bit:
Fixes the setting to 12-bit.
• 10-bit:
Fixes the setting to 10-bit.
z SDI SIGNAL LEVEL
Set to match the dynamic range (black-to-white)
of the input signals. This is only valid when YPBPR
and RGB input of HD-SDI. The setting will change
as follows each time the button is pressed.
4-1019
• 64-940:
Default: Black level defined as 64, White level as
940
• 4-1019:
Set this when gray appears black.
On-Screen display setting
The user can specify the on-screen display.
1. Press ▲▼ to select
“ON-SCREEN DISPLAY”.
AUX SDI IN
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
BACK COLOR
BLACK
• The “ON-SCREEN DISPLAY” screen will be
displayed.
2
1
3. Press ▲▼ to select the desired
item, and press ◄► to change
the setting.
z OSD POSITION
9 (Bottom right of
the screen)
2 (Left center of the
screen)
3 (Bottom left of the
screen)
4 (Top center of the
screen)
8 (Right center of
the screen)
7 (Top right of the
screen)
2
6
3
5
4
• 1:
Displayed in yellow.
• 2:
Displayed in blue.
• 3:
Displayed in white.
• 4:
Displayed in green.
• 5:
Displayed in pink.
• 6:
Displayed in brown.
The current menu cursor position will be retained
when you return to the page.
OFF
5 (Center of the
screen)
ON
z INPUT GUIDE
This sets whether to display the currently selected
input terminal name at the position set for “OSD
POSITION”.
OFF
This sets the position of the on-screen display
(OSD).
1 (Top left of the
screen)
1
z OSD MEMORY
2. Press ENTER.
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
OSD POSITION
OSD DESIGN
This sets the color of the on-screen display (OSD).
ON
z WARNING MESSAGE
This sets the display of warning messages.
OFF
ON
Special Features
64-940
z OSD DESIGN
Back Color
This sets the color for the projection screen when no
signals are being input.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “BACK
COLOR”.
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
BACK COLOR
STARTUP LOGO
BLACK
LOGO3
6 (Bottom center of
the screen)
ENGLISH – 75
Display Option settings (continued)
2. Press ◄► to switch “BACK
COLOR”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
BLACK
LOGO3
BLUE
LOGO1
LOGO2
• BLACK:
The entire projection area will appear black.
• BLUE:
The entire projection area will appear blue.
• LOGO1:
The picture registered by the user will be projected
in the projection area.
• LOGO2:
The picture registered by the user will be projected
in the projection area.
• LOGO3:
The Panasonic logo is projected.
Note
• Separate software is required in order to create the
pictures to use for “LOGO1” and “LOGO2”. Consult
your dealer.
Setting the startup logo
This sets the startup logo that is projected when the
power is turned on.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “STARTUP
LOGO”.
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
BACK COLOR
STARTUP LOGO
BLACK
LOGO3
2. Press ◄► to switch “STARTUP
LOGO”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
LOGO3
NONE
LOGO2
LOGO1
• LOGO3:
The Panasonic logo and DIGITAL PROJECTOR logo
are projected.
• NONE:
No startup logo is projected.
• LOGO1:
The picture registered by the user will be projected.
• LOGO2:
The picture registered by the user will be projected.
76 – ENGLISH
Note
• Separate software is required in order to create the
pictures to use for “LOGO1” and “LOGO2”. Consult
your dealer.
Projector setup
Setting a projector ID
The projector has an ID number setting function that
helps the user to control two or more projectors either
simultaneously or separately with a single remote
control. The ID number is set to “ALL” by default.
Hence the ID number need not be set when only
one projector is used.
MENU
▲▼◄►
ENTER
1. Press ▲▼ to select
“PROJECTOR ID”.
PROJECTOR SETUP
PROJECTOR ID
INSTALLATION
1/2
ALL
FRONT-FLOOR
2. Press ◄► to switch
“PROJECTOR ID”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
ALL
1
64
2
DEFAULT
3. Press MENU twice.
• This concludes the setting procedure and
the on-screen indications disappear and the
normal screen appears again.
MENU
Press to display the MAIN
MENU screen.
Press to select
“PROJECTOR SETUP”.
Press to display the
“PROJECTOR SETUP”
menu.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
ENTER
Note
• The ID number can be set to “ALL”, or selected
from “1” to “64”.
• If the projectors are given ID numbers, their remote
controls must be assigned the same ID numbers,
respectively.
• If the ID number of a projector is set to “ALL”, it can
be controlled by the remote control or the PC with
any ID number.
If multiple projectors are used and some of
them have their IDs set to “ALL”, they cannot be
controlled separately from the projectors with
other ID numbers. For details on remote control ID
setting, see page 18.
Special Features
This menu can be used to make a variety of
picture and projector settings.
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
ENGLISH – 77
Projector setup (continued)
Installation Setting
A projection scheme can be chosen depending on
the installation of the projector. If the picture is shown
upside down or in reverse, change the projection
scheme.
• Select the setting by displaying the on-screen
indications using buttons of the remote control or
the control panel on the main unit.
1. Press ▲▼ to select
“INSTALLATION”.
PROJECTOR ID
INSTALLATION
ALTITUDE MODE
ALL
FRONT-FLOOR
ON
2. Press ◄► to switch
“INSTALLATION”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
FRONT-FLOOR
FRONT-CELING
REAR-CELING
REAR-FLOOR
Floor mount front projection (FRONT-FLOOR)
3. Press MENU twice.
• The on-screen indications disappear and the
normal screen appears again.
Altitude Mode
When using the projector over 1 400 m above sea
level, set to “ON”.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “ALTITUDE
MODE”.
INSTALLATION
ALTITUDE MODE
DIRECTION
FRONT-FLOOR
ON
HORIZONTAL
2. Press ◄► to switch “ALTITUDE
MODE”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
OFF
ON
Direction
The fan speed is changed in accordance with the
projector orientation (pointed forward, or toward the
ceiling or floor)
1. Press ▲▼ to select
“DIRECTION”.
Ceiling mount front projection (FRONT-CEILING)
ALTITUDE MODE
DIRECTION
LAMP SELECT
ON
HORIZONTAL
QUAD
2. Press ◄► to switch
“DIRECTION”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
Floor mount rear projection (REAR-FLOOR)
Ceiling mount rear projection (REAR-CEILING)
78 – ENGLISH
HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL
• HORIZONTAL:
This is the standard setup.
• VERTICAL:
Select this if the projector is tilted at a large vertical
angle (an angle which exceeds 30°from the
horizontal).
Lamp select
This lets you switch the four light source lamps to one
of four brightnesses in accordance with the operating
conditions and purpose of use.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “LAMP
SELECT”.
DIRECTION
LAMP SELECT
LAMP RELAY
HORIZONTAL
QUAD
OFF
2. Press ◄► to switch “LAMP
SELECT”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
• “L1/L3/L4” : Three lamps illuminate.
(Lamp units 1, 3 and 4 take priority.)
• “L2/L3/L4” : Three lamps illuminate.
(Lamp units 2, 3 and 4 take priority.)
• “SINGLE” : One of the lamps illuminates.
(The lamp unit with the shortest operating time is
selected automatically.)
• “DUAL” : Two lamps illuminate.
(The lamp units with the shortest operating time
out of lamp units 1 and 4 or 2 and 3 are selected
automatically.)
• “TRIPLE” : Three lamps illuminate.
(The lamp unit with the shortest operating time is
selected automatically.)
3. Press ENTER.
QUAD
DUAL
L1
SINGLE
L2
L2/L3/L4
L3
L1/L3/L4
L4
L1/L2/L4
L1/L4
L1/L2/L3
L2/L3
• “QUAD” : The four lamps illuminate.
• “L1” : One lamp illuminates.
(Lamp unit 1 takes priority.)
• “L2” : One lamp illuminates.
(Lamp unit 2 takes priority.)
• “L3” : One lamp illuminates.
(Lamp unit 3 takes priority.)
• “L4” : One lamp illuminates.
(Lamp unit 4 takes priority.)
• “L1/L4” : Two lamps illuminate.
(Lamp unit 1 and 4 take priority.)
• “L2/L3” : Two lamps illuminate.
(Lamp unit 2 and 3 take priority.)
• “L1/L2/L3” : Three lamps illuminate.
(Lamp units 1, 2 and 3 take priority.)
• “L1/L2/L4” : Three lamps illuminate.
(Lamp units 1, 2 and 4 take priority.)
• For settings other than “QUAD”, any lamp which is
malfunctioning or which has a cumulative operating
time that exceeds 2 000 hours will be turned off
and the other lamps will be turned on. If “QUAD”
is selected, any lamp which is malfunctioning or
which has a cumulative operating time that exceeds
2 000 hours will be turned off and only the lamps
which have a cumulative operating time of less than
2 000 hours will be turned on. In addition, if the
cumulative operating times for all lamps exceed
2 000 hours, the projector will switch to standby
mode.
• Lamp units which are not turned on should still be
installed to the projector.
• When it is time to replace the lamp, the number of
the lamps that illuminate will be greater than the
specified number of lamps in order to prevent the
luminance from dropping.
• The characters in the lamp selection menu
will become green when they are selected.
Furthermore, the characters may flash depending
on the condition of the lamps.
Yellow:
An error has occurred with the
illumination of one or more of the lamps
White:
Unselected item
Red:
Lamp where an illumination error has
occurred
Special Features
Note
TRIPLE
ENGLISH – 79
Projector setup (continued)
2. Press ENTER.
Lamp relay
• The “RS-232C” screen will be displayed.
If using the projector for a continuous period of
24 hours or more, this setting can be used to
automatically switch the lamps that are turned on in
order to reduce the lamp deterioration that can occur
as a result of continuous use.
• “LAMP RELAY” will only be enabled when the lamp
selection is “SINGLE” (1 lamp), “DUAL” (2 lamps),
“TRIPLE” (3 lamps) or “QUAD” (4 lamps).
1. Press ▲▼ to select “LAMP
RELAY”.
LAMP SELECT
LAMP RELAY
RS-232C
QUAD
OFF
2. Press ◄► to switch “LAMP
RELAY”.
• The time interval for lamps to be switched will
change as shown in the diagram below each
time ◄► is pressed.
OFF
00:00
(Units of 1 hour)
23:00
01:00
RS-232C
SERIAL IN
(IN) BAUDRATE
(IN) PARITY
(OUT) BAUDRATE
(OUT) PARITY
RESPONSE(ID ALL)
GROUP
RESPONSE(ID GROUP)
RS-232C
9600
NONE
9600
NONE
ON
MASTER
ON
3. Press ▲▼ to select “SERIAL IN”.
4. Press ◄► to switch “SERIAL
IN”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
RS-232C
RS-422
5. Press ▲▼ to select
communication conditions.
6. Press ◄► to confirm the setting.
7. Press MENU three times.
Note
• The lamps will switch at the specified time when the
lamp selection is “SINGLE” or “DUAL”.
• When the lamp selection is “TRIPLE”, the lamps will
switch a total of three times at two-hour intervals
starting from the specified time, and after this the
previous operating status will be maintained until
the next specified time is reached.
• When the lamp selection is “QUAD”, three lamps
will illuminate from the specified time, and the three
lamps will switch a total of four times at two-hour
intervals from that time. After this, four lamps will
illuminate for eight hours from the specified time,
and then when the next specified time is reached,
switching between three lamps will resume.
• The setting time will be the local time. (p. 83)
RS-232C setting
• The on-screen indications disappear, and the
system returns to the normal screen.
Remote2 mode
This sets the REMOTE2 terminal. (p. 110)
1. Press ▲▼ to select “REMOTE2
MODE”.
RS-232C
REMOTE2 MODE
STATUS
DEFAULT
2. Press ◄► to switch “REMOTE2
MODE”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
DEFAULT
USER
This sets communication parameters for the
projector. (p. 106)
1. Press ▲▼ to select “RS-232C”.
LAMP RELAY
RS-232C
REMOTE2 MODE
80 – ENGLISH
OFF
DEFAULT
• DEFAULT:
The pin assignment of the REMOTE2 terminal is
used as the projector default setting. (p. 110)
• USER:
This is used for changing an optional input module,
using the REMOTE2 terminal, or for changing the
settings for the REMOTE2 terminal. Any settings
you make for pins 2 to 8 become valid once you
press the ENTER button.
Displays the status of the projector.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “STATUS”.
REMOTE2 MODE
STATUS
AIR FILTER CLEANING
DEFAULT
2. Press ENTER.
• The “STATUS” screen will be displayed.
STATUS
INPUT
NAME
SIGNAL FREQUENCY
PROJECTOR RUNTIME
LAMP1
LAMP2
LAMP3
LAMP4
INTAKE AIR TEMP.
OPTICS MODULE TEMP.
AROUND LAMP TEMP.
REMOTE2 STATUS
1/3
RGB2
XGA60-A399999
48.36kHz/59.99Hz
76h
341h / ON /
334h / ON /
342h / ON /
97h / ON /
31°C/87°F
27°C/80°F
31°C/87°F
DISABLE
3. Press ◄► to move to the next
page.
STATUS
PROJECTOR MODEL
SERIAL NUMBER
MAIN VERSION
SUB VERSION
NETWORK VERSION
2/3
DZ12000
SWXXXXX
1.00.00
0.04
1.01
4. Press ◄► to move to the next
page.
STATUS
ON COUNT
POWER ON TIMES
LAMP1 ON
LAMP2 ON
LAMP3 ON
LAMP4 ON
SHUTTER
AIR FILTER CLEANING
AUX
NUMBER OF ENTRY SIGNAL
AC VOLTAGE
3/3
8
362
363
366
116
0( 6)
1( 1)
MD77SD1:SN
0/96
NORMAL
• INPUT:
Displays the input selection state.
• NAME:
Displays the input signal name.
• SIGNAL FREQUENCY:
Displays the frequency of the input signal.
• PROJECTOR RUNTIME:
Displays the projector runtime.
• LAMP1:
Displays the lighting time of LAMP1.
• LAMP2:
Displays the lighting time of LAMP2.
• LAMP3:
Displays the lighting time of LAMP3.
• LAMP4:
Displays the lighting time of LAMP4.
• INTAKE AIR TEMP:
Displays the intake air temperature of the projector.
• OPTICS MODULE TEMP.:
Displays the temperature inside the projector.
• AROUND LAMP TEMP.:
Displays the temperature around the lamp of the
projector.
• REMOTE2 STATUS:
Displays the control status of REMOTE2.
• PROJECTOR MODEL:
Displays the type of projector.
• SERIAL NUMBER:
Displays the serial number of the projector.
• MAIN VERSION:
Displays the main version of the firmware of the
projector unit.
• SUB VERSION:
Displays the sub version of the firmware of the
projector unit.
• NETWORK VERSION:
Displays the network version of the projector unit.
• ON COUNT:
POWER ON TIMES:
Displays the number of times the power has
been turned on.
LAMP1 ON:
Displays the number of times LAMP1 has been lit.
LAMP2 ON:
Displays the number of times LAMP2 has been lit.
LAMP3 ON:
Displays the number of times LAMP3 has been lit.
LAMP4 ON:
Displays the number of times LAMP4 has been lit.
SHUTTER:
Displays the number of times the shutter function
has been used.
AIR FILTER CLEANING:
Displays the number of times the air filter has
been cleaned.
• AUX:
Displays the name of the optional input module
inserted in the input module.
• NUMBER OF ENTRY SIGNAL:
Displays the number of registered signals.
• AC VOLTAGE:
Displays the AC voltage state.
Special Features
Status
Cleaning the air filter
This can be used to set air filter cleaning.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “AIR FILTER
CLEANING”.
STATUS
AIR FILTER CLEANING
AUTO POWER OFF
DISABLE
ENGLISH – 81
Projector setup (continued)
2. Press ENTER.
• The “AIR FILTER CLEANING” screen will be
displayed.
• You can select the automatic cleaning time
(“TIME”) and also force cleaning to be carried
out immediately (“EXECUTE”).
AIR FILTER CLEANING
TIME
EXECUTE
00:00
3. Press ▲▼ to select “TIME”.
• Select “TIME” and then set the time for
automatic cleaning to be carried out.
• If you would like cleaning to be carried out
straight away, select “EXECUTE” and then
press ENTER.
4. Press ◄► to switch “TIME”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
00:00
Example: If the setting time is 7:00 and forced
cleaning is carried out at 9:00, then
automatic cleaning will not be carried out at
7:00 on the following day.
46 hours elapsed
22 hours elapsed
Setting time
Setting time
Setting time
Automatic Forced
cleaning cleaning
(No cleaning)
Automatic
cleaning
• If the time is set to a time which is within 24
hours from the last time cleaning was carried out,
automatic cleaning will not be carried out the next
time the setting time is reached. Instead, cleaning
will be carried out when the setting time is reached
on the following day.
Example: If cleaning was carried out at 10:00, and
the cleaning time setting is then changed
to 20:00, automatic cleaning will be carried
out at 20:00 on the following day.
23:50
(in units of 10 minutes)
• The default setting is “00:00” (midnight).
Example: When the default setting is in use,
automatic cleaning will start at 00:00 if the
projector is in projection mode. If the time
is set to 7:00, automatic cleaning will start
at that time if the projector is in projection
mode.
Note
• Contaminants such as oil and cigarette tar cannot
be cleaned when air filter cleaning is carried out.
Please use the optional “Smoke Cut” filter in these
environments.
• The air filter cleaning monitor (FILTER CLEANING)
will flash blue while cleaning of the air filter is in
progress. If there is a problem with the air filter, the
air filter cleaning monitor (FILTER CLEANING) will
light red.
• The time taken for cleaning is approximately 30 to
40 seconds.
• The setting time will be the local time. (p. 83)
• If the projector is not in projection mode when the
setting time is reached, automatic cleaning will not
be carried out.
• Automatic cleaning will not be carried out if 24
hours have not yet elapsed since cleaning was last
carried out (either by automatic cleaning or forced
cleaning).
34 hours elapsed
10 hours elapsed
Setting time
Setting time
Automatic
cleaning
(No cleaning)
Automatic
cleaning
Time reset
• When projection starts (when the power is
turned on), automatic cleaning will be carried out
immediately if more than 24 hours have elapsed
since cleaning was last carried out.
Auto power off
The projector can be set to automatically enter the
standby state if no signal is input before the set time
elapses.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “AUTO
POWER OFF”.
AIR FILTER CLEANING
AUTO POWER OFF
FUNC1
DISABLE
2. Press ◄► to switch “AUTO
POWER OFF”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
DISABLE
90MIN.
82 – ENGLISH
Setting time
45MIN.
60MIN.
75MIN.
4. Press ◄► to switch “TIME
ZONE”.
Setting FUNC1
The user can specify the function of the “FUNC1”
button on the remote control.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “FUNC1”.
6. Press ENTER.
DISABLE
• The “ADJUST CLOCK” screen will be
displayed.
2. Press ENTER.
• The “FUNC1” screen will be displayed.
FUNC1
DISABLE
C P IN P
3. Press ▲▼ to select a function.
• DISABLE:
Disables the FUNC1 button.
• P IN P:
Enables setting of P IN P to “OFF”, “USER 1”,
“USER 2”, or “USER 3”. (pp. 85-86)
• SUB MEMORY:
The sub memory can be switched. (pp. 46-47)
• SYSTEM SELECTOR:
Allows the system selector to be switched.
(pp. 58-59)
• SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW:
Allows the system daylight view to be switched.
(pp. 56-57)
• FREEZE:
Allows switching to freeze mode for temporarily
stopping video.
4. Press ENTER.
Setting the date and time
This lets you set the time zone and the current date
and time for the projector’s internal clock.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “DATE AND
TIME”.
PROJECTOR SETUP
DATE AND TIME
SAVE ALL USER DATA
2/2
ADJUST CLOCK
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
HOUR
MINUTE
APPLY
7. Press ▲▼ to select the item to
be set, and use ◄► to set the
local time.
8. Use ▲▼ to select “APPLY”, and
then press ENTER.
• This completes setting of the time.
Save all user data
This saves various setting values as a backup to the
internal memory of the projector.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “SAVE ALL
USER DATA”.
DATE AND TIME
SAVE ALL USER DATA
LOAD ALL USER DATA
2. Press ENTER.
• The “SECURITY PASSWORD” screen will be
displayed.
SECURITY PASSWORD
3. Enter the password set for
the security password of the
security menu.
• A confirmation screen will appear.
2. Press ENTER.
SAVE ALL USER DATA?
• The “DATE AND TIME” screen will be
displayed.
DATE AND TIME
TIME ZONE
ADJUST CLOCK
LOCAL DATE
LOCAL TIME
2008
2
2
13
15
Special Features
AIR FILTER CLEANING
AUTO POWER OFF
FUNC1
5. Press ▲▼ to select “ADJUST
CLOCK”.
OK
ENTER
09:00
2008/01/01
12:34:56
3. Press ▲▼ to select “TIME
ZONE”.
PROGRESS
CANCEL
CHANGE
EXECUTE
4. Press ◄► to select “OK”, and
press ENTER.
Note
• “NETWORK/E-MAIL” and “LOGO IMAGE” are not
saved.
ENGLISH – 83
Projector setup (continued)
Load all user data
This loads various setting values that were saved as a
backup to the internal memory of the projector.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “LOAD ALL
USER DATA”.
SAVE ALL USER DATA
LOAD ALL USER DATA
INITIALIZE
2. Press ENTER.
• The “SECURITY PASSWORD” screen will be
displayed.
SECURITY PASSWORD
3. Enter the password set for
the security password of the
security menu.
• A confirmation screen will appear.
LOAD ALL USER DATA?
PROGRESS
After data has been loaded,
power will turn off automatically.
Please wait for the fan to finish cooling
before you turn on the projector again.
OK
ENTER
CANCEL
CHANGE
EXECUTE
4. Press ◄► to select “OK”, and
press ENTER.
3. Enter the password set for
the security password of the
security menu.
• The “INITIALIZE” screen will be displayed.
INITIALIZE
ALL USER DATA
ENTRY SIGNAL
NETWORK/E-MAIL
LOGO IMAGE
• ALL USER DATA:
This is for use by service personnel. All
setting values including “ENTRY SIGNAL”,
“NETWORK/E-MAIL”, and “LOGO IMAGE”
are returned to their factory default values.
A restart will be required to complete the
initialization of ALL USER DATA.
• ENTRY SIGNAL:
All setting values saved for each of the
input signals are cleared. To clear just some
registered signals, perform the procedure
described in “Clearing the data of registered
signals”. (p. 46)
• NETWORK/E-MAIL:
This returns “NETWORK/E-MAIL” to its factory
default value.
• LOGO IMAGE:
The settings for the images registered for
LOGO1 and LOGO2 are returned to their
factory default images. (p. 76)
4. Press ▲▼ to select the desired
initialize item, and press ENTER.
• A confirmation screen will appear.
Note
INITIALIZE NETWORK/E-MAIL?
PROGRESS
• If this is executed, the projector enters a standby
state in order to reflect the setting values.
Initialize
This returns various setting values to their factory
default settings.
1. Press ▲▼ to select
“INITIALIZE”.
LOAD ALL USER DATA
INITIALIZE
SERVICE PASSWORD
2. Press ENTER.
• The “SECURITY PASSWORD” screen will be
displayed.
SECURITY PASSWORD
84 – ENGLISH
OK
ENTER
CANCEL
CHANGE
SET
5. Press ◄► to select “OK”, and
press ENTER.
Service password
This function is used by a service person.
Input the password with the numeric buttons (0 to 9)
of the remote control and press ENTER to confirm the
entry.
P IN P
Using the P IN P function
Two videos can be projected simultaneously by
placing a separate small sub screen within the main
screen.
1. Press ENTER.
• The “P IN P” screen will be displayed.
MENU
▲▼◄►
ENTER
P IN P
P IN P MODE
OFF
2. Press ▲▼ to select “P IN P
MODE”.
P IN P MODE
OFF
C USER1
USER2
USER3
3. Press ▲▼ to select a function.
• OFF:
The P IN P function is not used.
• USER1, USER2, USER3:
The P IN P function is used with the settings
that were set in “Setting the P IN P function”.
4. Press ENTER.
MENU
Press to display the MAIN
MENU screen.
Press to select “P IN P”.
Press to display the “P IN
P” menu.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
ENTER
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
Setting the P IN P function
The settings of the P IN P function can be saved to
“USER1”, “USER2”, and “USER3”.
1. Refer to “Using the P IN P
function” above, and then select
from “USER1”, “USER2”, and
“USER3”.
• The settings for the user data selected for “P IN
P MODE” are displayed.
P IN P
P IN P MODE
MAIN WINDOW
SIZE
POSITION
SUB WINDOW
SIZE
POSITION
FRAME LOCK
TYPE
USER1
VIDEO
Special Features
This item is used to set the condition of the
Picture-In-Picture.
RGB2
MAIN WINDOW
SUB WINDOW
2. Press ▲▼ to select the desired
setting item, and press ENTER.
• The sub menu for the selected item appears.
ENGLISH – 85
P IN P (continued)
• MAIN WINDOW:
The input terminal for the main window is
displayed. Press ▲▼ to select an item, and
press ENTER to switch to the item.
SIZE: The user can specify the display size of
the main window between 10 % and 100 %.
POSITION: The user can specify the display
position of the main window on the screen.
• SUB WINDOW:
The input terminal for the SUB WINDOW is
displayed. Press ▲▼ to select an item, and
press ENTER to switch to the item.
SIZE: The user can specify the display size of
the subwindow between 10 % and 100 %.
POSITION: The user can specify the display
position of the subwindow on the screen.
• FRAME LOCK:
The user can select the window to apply frame
lock. Press ◄► to switch windows.
“MAIN WINDOW”: Frame lock is set for the
input signals specified for the main window.
“SUB WINDOW”: Frame lock is set for the
input signals specified for the subwindow.
• TYPE:
The user can select the window that is
displayed by priority when two windows
overlap. Press ◄► to switch windows.
“MAIN WINDOW”: The main window is
displayed by priority.
“SUB WINDOW”: The subwindow is displayed
by priority.
Note
• The P IN P function is not available depending on
the input signals and the selected input terminals.
Refer to “List of P IN P” for details. (p. 124)
• The main window’s picture adjustment values such
as the picture mode, gamma selection and color
temperature setting for the main window will be
applied.
• In the normal screen (when the menu is not
displayed), the ◄► buttons can be used to switch
the size and position of the main window and
subwindow when the P IN P function is on. When
switching from USER1 to USER2 to USER3 modes,
picture disruption will occur.
86 – ENGLISH
Displaying the internal test pattern
Test pattern
Results of adjustment on the image, picture quality,
position, size and other factors will not be reflected
in test patterns. Be sure to display the input signal
before performing various kinds of setting.
1. Press ◄► to search through the
various types of test patterns.
MENU
▲▼◄►
ENTER
„ Cycle of displayed internal test
patterns
The setting will change as follows each time ◄►
is pressed.
MENU screen
+
Focus
MENU screen
+
Color bars
MENU screen
+
Entry screen
MENU screen
+
All white
The projector has 8 types of internal test patterns
to check the condition of the set.
MENU
Press to display the MAIN
MENU screen.
Press to select “TEST
PATTERN”.
Press to display the
“TEST PATTERN” screen.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
ENTER
MENU screen
+
Window (inversion)
MENU screen
+
Window
MENU screen
+
Flag
MENU screen
+
Flag (inversion)
Special Features
MENU screen
+
All black
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
ENGLISH – 87
Setting the security
Displaying the security
screen
Password settings and text settings can be made
after the security screen is displayed.
z If using for the first time
MENU
▲▼◄►
ENTER
1. Press ▲, ►, ▼, ◄, ▲, ►, ▼ and
◄ in this order.
z If the existing password has been changed
Enter the new password.
SECURITY PASSWORD
2. Press ENTER.
• The “SECURITY” screen will be displayed.
Note
• Only asterisks * will appear on the screen to
represent the actual characters of the password
when the password is entered.
Setting the security
password
The unit’s security function serves to display the
password input screen or to set and display the
user company’s URL under the projected pictures.
MENU
Press to display the MAIN
MENU screen.
Press to select
“SECURITY”.
Press to display the
“SECURITY” menu.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
ENTER
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
88 – ENGLISH
The SECURITY PASSWORD screen can be displayed
when the power has been turned on. If the correct
password is not entered, operations other than using
the POWER STANDBY ( ) button and SHUTTER
button and adjusting the lens will not be possible.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “SECURITY
PASSWORD”.
SECURITY
SECURITY PASSWORD
SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE
OFF
2. Press ◄► to switch “SECURITY
PASSWORD”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
OFF
• ON:
Password entry is enabled.
• OFF:
Password entry is disabled.
ON
Changing the security
password
The password can be changed.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “SECURITY
PASSWORD CHANGE”.
OFF
OFF
Note
2. Press ENTER.
• The “SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE” screen
will be displayed.
SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE
NEW
CONFIRM
• Separate software is required in order to create the
pictures to use for “LOGO1” and “LOGO2”. Consult
your dealer.
Changing the text
3. Press ▲▼◄► to set the
password.
When DISPLAY SETTING is enabled, you can change
the text that is displayed.
• Up to 8 buttons can be set as the password.
4. Press ENTER.
5. For the purposes of
confirmation, enter the password
again.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “TEXT
CHANGE”.
DISPLAY SETTING
TEXT CHANGE
CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
OFF
2. Press ENTER.
• The “TEXT CHANGE” screen will be displayed.
6. Press ENTER.
TEXT CHANGE
Note
SELECT
• Only asterisks * will appear on the screen to
represent the actual characters of the password
when the password is entered.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ; : , .
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
p q r s t u v w x y z / + - *
Setting the text
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
The set text can be permanently displayed below the
pictures being projected.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “DISPLAY
SETTING”.
SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE
DISPLAY SETTING
TEXT CHANGE
OFF
<
>
BS
OK
_ @ [ ]
CANCEL
3. Press ◄► to select the text
position, and press ▲▼ to select
the characters of the text.
Special Features
SECURITY PASSWORD
SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE
DISPLAY SETTING
• OFF:
The text display is disabled.
• TEXT:
The text display is enabled.
• LOGO1:
The picture registered by the user will be projected.
• LOGO2:
The picture registered by the user will be projected.
• LOGO3:
The Panasonic logo is projected.
4. Press ENTER.
• The text is now changed.
2. Press ◄► to switch “DISPLAY
SETTING”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
OFF
TEXT
LOGO3
LOGO1
LOGO2
ENGLISH – 89
Setting the security (continued)
Control device setup
Control from the remote control and main unit
controls can be restricted.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “CONTROL
DEVICE SETUP”.
DISPLAY SETTING
TEXT CHANGE
CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
OFF
2. Press ENTER.
• The “CONTROL DEVICE SETUP” screen will be
displayed.
CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
CONTROL PANEL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
3. Press ▲▼ to select “CONTROL
PANEL” or “REMOTE
CONTROLLER”.
• CONTROL PANEL:
Restriction of control from the main unit
controls can be set.
• ENABLE:
Enables control from the main unit controls.
• DISABLE:
Disables control from the main unit controls.
• REMOTE CONTROLLER:
Restriction of control from the remote control
can be set.
• ENABLE:
Enables control from the remote control.
• DISABLE:
Disables control from the remote control.
4. Press ENTER.
• The “CONTROL PANEL” or “REMOTE
CONTROLLER” screen will be displayed.
CONTROL PANEL
C ENABLE
DISABLE
5. Press ▲▼ to select “ENABLE”
or “DISABLE”, and then press
ENTER.
• A confirmation screen will appear.
SURE?
EXECUTE
ENTER
CANCEL
CHANGE
EXECUTE
6. Press ◄► to select “EXECUTE”,
and then press ENTER.
90 – ENGLISH
Note
• If a setting is reflected, the on-screen menu
disappears. To continue operation, press the MENU
button to display the main menu.
• If an attempt is made to control the projector from
the remote control or main unit controls when
“ENABLE” is set, the security password screen
appears. To change a setting, enter the security
password and change the operation setting. The
security password screen disappears if the MENU
button is pressed or no operation is performed for
10 seconds.
How to use network functions
Network standby
When the projector is in a standby state, you can
control the power of the projector from a computer
connected via a wired LAN.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “NETWORK
STANDBY”.
MENU
▲▼◄►
ENTER
NETWORK
NETWORK STANDBY
NETWORK SETUP
OFF
2. Press ◄► to switch “NETWORK
STANDBY”.
• The setting will change as follows each time
◄► is pressed.
OFF
DEFAULT
ON
• ON:
Enables the network standby function.
• OFF:
Disables the network standby function.
This allows you to use network functions.
MENU
Press to display the MAIN
MENU screen.
Press to select
“NETWORK”.
Press to display the
“NETWORK” menu.
MAIN MENU
PICTURE
POSITION
ADVANCED MENU
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY OPTION
PROJECTOR SETUP
P IN P
TEST PATTERN
SIGNAL LIST
SECURITY
NETWORK
ENTER
MENU SELECT
SUB MENU
Make the initial network function settings before using
the network functions.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “NETWORK
SETUP”.
NETWORK STANDBY
NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONTROL
OFF
2. Press ENTER.
• The “NETWORK SETUP” screen will be
displayed.
NETWORK SETUP
HOST NAME
DHCP
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY
STORE
PROJECTOR
OFF
192. 168. 0. 8
255. 255. 255. 0
192. 168. 0. 1
Special Features
Initial setting of network
function
3. Press ▲▼ to select items, and
press ENTER to change the
setting.
• HOST NAME (Display of host name and
setting) :
Change as needed when using a DHCP server.
ENGLISH – 91
How to use network functions (continued)
• DHCP (DHCP client function) :
Set the DHCP item to ON when to acquire
an IP address automatically using the DHCP
server. Set to OFF if DHCP server is not used.
Enter the IP address if DHCP server is not
used.
• IP ADDRESS (Display of IP address and
setting) :
Enter the IP address if DHCP server is not
used.
• SUBNET MASK (Displaying and setting the
subnet mask) :
If not using a DHCP server, enter the subnet
mask.
• GATEWAY (Display of gateway address and
setting) :
Enter the gateway address if DHCP server is
not used.
• STORE:
Save the current network settings.
4. Press ▲▼ to select “STORE”,
and then press ENTER.
Note
• Before using the DHCP server, make sure the DHCP
server is already functioning.
• For details of IP address, subnet mask, and
gateway, ask the network administrator.
Network control
Network status
This displays the network status of the main unit.
This sets the network control method.
1. Press ▲▼ to select “NETWORK
CONTROL”.
NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONTROL
NETWORK STATUS
1. Press ▲▼ to select “NETWORK
STATUS”.
NETWORK SETUP
NETWORK CONTROL
NETWORK STATUS
2. Press ENTER.
2. Press ENTER.
• The “NETWORK CONTROL” screen will be
displayed.
NETWORK CONTROL
WEB CONTROL
WEB PORT
PJLink CONTROL
COMMAND CONTROL
COMMAND PORT
STORE
• WEB CONTROL:
Set this to ON when you want to perform
control with the Web browser. (pp. 93-104)
• WEB PORT:
Set the port number to use.
• PJLink CONTROL:
Set this to ON when you want to perform
control with the PJLink protocol. (p. 105)
• COMMAND CONTROL:
Set to ON to control using the control
command via the serial terminal. (pp.106-109)
If settings have been made without an
administrator password of the Web browser
control, add 2-byte “00” instead of STX,
and a line-feed code (0Dh) instead of ETX. If
settings have been made with an administrator
password of the Web browser control, add a
32-byte hash value and “00” instead of STX
and a line-feed code (0Dh) instead of ETX.
The hash value is created by MD5 combining
“admin1:”, password, “:” and random numbers.
The random numbers are 8-byte values sent
from the projector when connecting.
• COMMAND PORT:
Set the port number used for the command
control.
• STORE:
Save the current network control settings.
ON
80
OFF
OFF
1024
3. Press ▲▼ to select items, and
press ◄► to change the setting.
• The “NETWORK STATUS” screen will be
displayed.
NETWORK STATUS
DHCP
IP ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
GATEWAY
DNS1
DNS2
MAC ADDRESS
OFF
192. 168. 0. 8
255. 255. 255. 0
192. 168. 0. 1
0.
0. 0. 200
0.
0. 0. 0
00:0B:97:41:03:05
Returning the network function
setting back to the factory setting
Network function settings such as the IP address,
password, and e-mail settings can be return to
their factory settings with the initialize menu of the
projector setup. (p. 84)
92 – ENGLISH
Network connections
The projector is equipped with network functions, and web browser controls can be used to carry out the
following operations from a computer.
• Projector settings and adjustments
• Projector status display
• Transmission of E-mail messages if there is a problem with the projector
Note
• A LAN cable is required to use the network function. A cross cable is required when connecting directly to a
computer. Straight cables are used when connecting through a switch or router.
PC
Projector
LAN cable (straight)
•
•
•
•
A Web browser is required to use this function. Make sure that a Web browser is available in the system.
Use Microsoft Windows 98SE/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP/Vista for the OS of your personal computer.
The Web browser should be Internet Explorer 6.0 or later or Netscape Communicator 7.0 or later.
To use the E-mail function, communication with E-mail server must be established. Make sure that E-mail
feature is available in your system.
• Use a straight insulated LAN cable which supports category 5 or above.
• The length of LAN cable must be 100 m or shorter.
„ Name and function of network function parts
LAN terminal (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
Connect LAN cable here.
IN
OUT
REMOTE 1
RS-232C IN
REMOTE 2 IN
IN
OUT
VIDEO S-VIDEO IN
R/PR
G/Y
SYNC/HD
RGB 1 IN
RS-422 IN
SERIAL
RS-422 OUT
LAN
Special Features
LAN cable (straight)
LAN LINK/ACT lamp (green)
This lights when a LAN cable is connected
and flashes when signals are being received
or sent.
B/PB
VD
RGB 2 IN
DVI-D IN
LAN10/100 lamp (yellow)
This lights when a 100BASE-TX connection
is established.
Attention
• If the LAN terminal is touched by electrostatically charged hands (or body), failure may be caused by the
discharge of static electricity.
Be careful not to touch metallic part of LAN terminal or LAN cable.
• Connect indoor equipment to the LAN.
ENGLISH – 93
How to use network functions (continued)
Accessing from the Web browser
1. Activate the Web browser in the personal computer.
2. Enter the IP address set by the projector into the URL input field of the
Web browser.
3. Enter your “User Name” and “Password”.
• The factory default settings are user1 (user privileges) or admin1 (administrator privileges) for the user name
and panasonic (lowercase letters) for the password.
4. Press OK to display the Projector status page.
Note
• Avoid activating two or more Web browser simultaneously to work out setting or control actions.
• Change the password first of all.
• Administrator privileges enable the use of all functions. User privileges enable the use of only “Projector status”,
“Error information”, “Network status”, “Basic control”, and “Change password”.
• If the password is incorrectly entered three times in a row, the lock is set for several minutes.
„ Change Password page
Click [Change password].
Old password input field
New password input field
New password input field
(re-enter for confirmation)
Button for executing password change
When you log in with administrator privileges,
the button for resetting the password for user
privileges is displayed.
94 – ENGLISH
„ Basic control page
This page is the first page displayed when the projector is accessed through a web browser.
To move from another page, click [Projector control], then [Basic control].
Page selection tabs
Click these to switch pages.
This displays the on-screen status. It is
displayed even if the on-screen display of the
projector is set to off.
Monitor information button
Click this item, and the status of the projector
is displayed.
Detailed set up button
Click this item to display the advanced
settings page.
Change password button
Power On/Off control
OSD (On-screen Display) display/nondisplay
System type switching
Use these to select the input signals.
Special Features
SHUTTER control
ENGLISH – 95
How to use network functions (continued)
„ Detail control page
Click [Projector control], then [Detail control] to display the Detail control page.
Pressing these buttons controls the projector
and updates the on-screen description on
the right of the control page when control is
finished.
Lens adjustment
Test pattern display
This button updates the on-screen description
on the right of the control page with the latest
information.
Menu display
„ Projector status page
Click [Status], then [Projector status] to display the Status information page.
This page displays the projector statuses established for the items shown below.
Displays the firmware version of the projector
main unit.
Displays the type of projector.
Displays the input switching status.
Displays temperature of projector’s intake air.
Displays temperature inside the projector.
Displays temperature of projector exhaust.
Displays the lamp lit hours.
Displays self-diagnosis information.
Displays used hours of the projector.
96 – ENGLISH
„ Error information page
When
is displayed on the status information screen, click it to display the error
details.
• Depending on the nature of the error, the projector may be placed in the standby mode for its own
protection.
z When [FAILED] has appeared for an item
Description
MAIN CPU BUS
Trouble has occurred in the microcomputer circuitry. Consult your dealer.
FAN
Trouble has occurred in the fan or its drive circuit. Consult your dealer.
OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE
The temperature inside the projector is high. It may be that the projector is being
used in an operating environment where the temperature is high such as near a
heating appliance.
INPUT AIR TEMPERATURE
The input air temperature is too high. It may be that the projector is being used in
an operating environment where the temperature is high such as near a heating
appliance.
OUTPUT AIR TEMPERATURE
The temperature around the lamp is too high. It may be that the projector’s
ventilation holes are blocked.
LAMP REMAIN TIME
The lamp runtime has exceeded the prescribed cumulative time, and it is now time
to replace the lamp.
LAMP STATUS
The lamp has failed to light.
Wait a short while for the lamp to cool off, and then turn on the power.
APERTURE
(CONTRAST-SHUTTER)
Trouble has occurred in the contrast shutter circuitry. Consult your dealer.
SHUTTER
(MUTE-SHUTTER)
Trouble has occurred in the shutter circuitry. Consult your dealer.
DIRTY AIR FILTER
AIR FILTER CLEANER UNIT
Special Features
Parameter
OK: Normal operation
FAILED: Occurrence of trouble
The air filter is blocked with dust.
Turn off the MAIN POWER switch by following the procedure on page 39, and
then clean the air filter. (pp. 112-113)
The air filter unit is not installed. Install the air filter unit.
OPTICS MODULE TEMP.SENSOR
Trouble has occurred in the temperature detection sensor inside the projector.
Consult your dealer.
INPUT AIR TEMP.SENSOR
Trouble has occurred in the sensor used to detect the input air temperature.
Consult your dealer.
OUTPUT TEMP. SENSOR
Trouble has occurred in the sensor used to detect the exhaust air temperature.
Consult your dealer.
BATTERY
The backup battery has been run out. Consult your dealer.
CLOGGED FILTER SENSOR
Problem with clogged filter sensor. Consult your dealer.
AC POWER
AC power supply voltage input has dropped. Check that there is sufficient
electrical wiring capacity for the projector’s power consumption requirements.
LENS SHIFT
Problem with lens shift circuit. Consult your dealer.
ENGLISH – 97
How to use network functions (continued)
„ E-mail setup page
With this projector, if a problem occurs or if the lamp usage time reaches a set value, an e-mail message can
be sent to one or more preset e-mail addresses (maximum two addresses).
Click [Detailed set up], then [E-mail set up] to display the E-mail setup page.
Select “Enable” to use the E-mail function.
Enter the IP address or server name of the
E-mail server (SMTP). The DNS server must
be set if the server name is entered.
Enter the E-mail address of the projector.
(maximum 63 characters)
The user can enter the location of, for
example, the installed projector so that the
recipient may easily identify the originator of
the E-mail. (maximum 63 characters)
The user can modify the minimum time
interval of temperature warning mail. The
default value is 60 minutes. In this case, the
user cannot send another mail for 60 minutes
after sending previous temperature warning
mail even the set warning temperature is
reached again.
The user can modify the threshold
temperature for sending temperature warning
mail. If the temperature rises above the set
value, control sends temperature warning
mail.
Enter the E-mail address of your desired
recipient.
Select the conditions for sending E-mail.
MAIL CONTENTS:
Select “NORMAL” or “SIMPLE”.
ERROR:
an error is detected by self-diagnosis.
LAMP1 RUNTIME:
remaining lamp service time has reached the
value set in the field.
LAMP2 RUNTIME:
remaining lamp service time has reached the
value set in the field.
LAMP3 RUNTIME:
remaining lamp service time has reached the
value set in the field.
LAMP4 RUNTIME:
remaining lamp service time has reached the
value set in the field.
INPUT AIR TEMPERATURE:
intake air temperature has reached the value
set in the field.
OUTPUT AIR TEMPERATURE:
exhaust temperature has reached the value
set in the field.
98 – ENGLISH
Special Features
Periodic warning interval setting (E-mail is sent
on the checked days of the week/times)
ENGLISH – 99
How to use network functions (continued)
„ E-mail setup page (continued)
Enter the E-mail address to which the E-mail
is to be sent when two E-mail addresses are
going to be used. Do not enter it when the
second E-mail address is not going to be
used.
Select the conditions for sending E-mail to the
second E-mail address.
MAIL CONTENTS:
Select “NORMAL” or “SIMPLE”.
ERROR:
an error is detected by self-diagnosis.
LAMP1 RUNTIME:
remaining lamp service time has reached the
value set in the field.
LAMP2 RUNTIME:
remaining lamp service time has reached the
value set in the field.
LAMP3 RUNTIME:
remaining lamp service time has reached the
value set in the field.
LAMP4 RUNTIME:
remaining lamp service time has reached the
value set in the field.
INPUT AIR TEMPERATURE:
intake air temperature has reached the value
set in the field.
OUTPUT AIR TEMPERATURE:
exhaust temperature has reached the value
set in the field.
Check these boxes when E-mail is to be sent
periodically to the second E-mail address.
E-mail will be sent at the times and on the
days checked.
Button to update settings
100 – ENGLISH
„ Authentication set up page
The POP server is set on this page when POP authentication is required for mail transmissions.
Click [Detailed set up], then [Authentication set up] to display the POP server setup page.
Select the authentication method specified by
your Internet service provider.
Set this if SMTP authentication has been
selected.
POP server name field
Available input characters:
Alphanumeric characters (A–Z, a–z, 0–9),
hyphen (-), period (.)
POP server user name field
POP server password field
Enter the port number for the SMTP server
(normally “25”).
Enter the port number for the POP server
(normally “110”).
Button to update settings
„ Ping test page
Enter the IP address of the server to be
tested.
Button for conducting the test.
Special Features
This page makes it possible to check whether the network is connected to the E-mail server, POP server,
DNS server, etc.
Click [Detailed set up], then [Ping test] to display the Ping test page.
Display which appears when the
connection was successful.
Display which appears when the
connection failed.
ENGLISH – 101
How to use network functions (continued)
„ Contents of mail sent
z Mail with the contents shown below is sent when the E-mail settings have been established.
=== Panasonic projector report(CONFIGURE) ===
Projector Type
: DZ12000
----- E-mail setup data ----TEMPERATURE WARNING SETUP
MINIMUM TIME
at [ 60] minutes interval
INPUT AIR TEMPERATURE
Over [ 35degC / 95degF ]
OUTPUT AIR TEMPERATURE Over [ 60degC / 140degF ]
ERROR
LAMP1 RUNTIME
LAMP1 RUNTIME
LAMP2 RUNTIME
LAMP2 RUNTIME
LAMP3 RUNTIME
LAMP3 RUNTIME
LAMP4 RUNTIME
LAMP4 RUNTIME
INPUT AIR TEMPERATURE
OUTPUT AIR TEMPERATURE
PERIODIC REPORT
Sunday
[ ON ]
Thursday [ ON ]
00:00
04:00
08:00
12:00
16:00
20:00
[
[
[
[
[
[
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
]
]
]
]
]
]
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Monday
Friday
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
at
01:00
05:00
09:00
13:00
17:00
21:00
[ ON
[ ON
----- check system ----MAIN CPU BUS
FAN
OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE
INPUT AIR TEMPERATURE
OUTPUT AIR TEMPERATURE
LAMP1 REMAIN TIME
LAMP2 REMAIN TIME
LAMP3 REMAIN TIME
LAMP4 REMAIN TIME
[
[
[
[
[
[
REMAIN
REMAIN
REMAIN
REMAIN
REMAIN
REMAIN
REMAIN
REMAIN
]
]
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
200]
100]
200]
100]
200]
100]
200]
100]
Tuesday
Saturday
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
]
]
]
]
]
]
02:00
06:00
10:00
14:00
18:00
22:00
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
[
[
[
[
[
[
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
[ ON
[ ON
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Wednesday [ ON
03:00
07:00
11:00
15:00
19:00
23:00
[
[
[
[
[
[
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
z Mail with the contents shown below is sent when an error has occurred.
=== Panasonic projector report(ERROR) ===
Projector Type
: DZ12000
----- check system ----MAIN CPU BUS
FAN
OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE
INPUT AIR TEMPERATURE
OUTPUT AIR TEMPERATURE
LAMP1 REMAIN TIME
LAMP2 REMAIN TIME
LAMP3 REMAIN TIME
LAMP4 REMAIN TIME
LAMP1 STATUS
LAMP2 STATUS
LAMP3 STATUS
LAMP4 STATUS
APERTURE(CONTRAST-SHUTTER)
SHUTTER(MUTE-SHUTTER)
DIRTY AIR FILTER
AIR FILTER CLEANER UNIT
OPTICS MODULE TEMP.SENSOR
INPUT AIR TEMP.SENSOR
OUTPUT AIR TEMP.SENSOR
BATTERY
CLOGGED FILTER SENSOR
LENS SHIFT
COVER OPEN
AC POWER
(Error code 00 00 00 00 00
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[ FAILED
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
[
OK
00 00 00
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
00 00 00 10 00 00 00 00)
Input air temperature
: 27 degC /
Optics module temperature : 34 degC /
Output air temperature
: 33 degC /
SET RUNTIME
12 H
POWER ON
12 times
LAMP1 ON
419 times
LAMP1 HIGH
314 H
LAMP2 ON
363 times
LAMP2 HIGH
252 H
102 – ENGLISH
80 degF
93 degF
91 degF
„ Adjust clock page
Click [Detailed set up], then [Adjust clock] to display the Adjust clock page.
Time zone selection
Button to update time zone setting
New date field
New time field
Button to update time and date settings
Note
• If the time becomes incorrect immediately after setting the correct time, then the battery needs to be changed.
Contact the dealer where you bought the projector to have the battery changed.
„ Network config page
Click [Detailed set up], then [Network config] to display the Network config page.
Enter the IP address if DHCP server is not
used.
Enter the net mask if DHCP server is not
used.
Enter the gateway address if DHCP server is
not used.
DNS server address (primary) field
Available input characters:
Numeric characters (0–9), period (.)
(Example: 192.168.0.253)
Special Features
Set this to ON to enable the DHCP client
function.
DNS server address (secondary) field
Available input characters:
Numeric characters (0–9), period (.)
(Example: 192.168.0.254)
Enter the port number here. Number 80 is
normally used.
Enter the name of the projector here. Enter
the host name here if it is required when
the DHCP server is going to be used, for
instance.
Button to update settings
ENGLISH – 103
How to use network functions (continued)
„ Firmware update page
(The firmware should be updated only by an individual with the specialized knowledge required to do this.)
Enter here the filename of the firmware to be
updated.
After entering the filename, press the [Upload]
button. Data transfer is now commenced.
It will require several minutes for the data to
be transferred.
The time taken will differ depending on the
network conditions.
Displays the current version.
Displays the updated version.
Check the updated version against the current
version, and if everything is in order, press
the [OK] button. Version data rewriting is now
commenced.
Do not turn off the power while the version
data is being rewritten.
Messages such as the ones shown below appear during data rewriting.
The following message appears upon completion of the version data rewriting.
104 – ENGLISH
Using the PJLink™ protocol
The network function of the projector supports PJLink™ class 1, and the PJLink™ protocol can be used to
perform projector setting and projector status query operations from a PC.
Supported commands
The following table lists the PJLink™ protocol commands that can be used to control the projector.
Control details
Notes
Parameters
0 = Standby
1 = Power ON
POWR
Power supply control
POWR ?
Parameters
Power supply status query 0 = Standby
2 = Cool-down in progress
INPT
Input selection
INPT ?
Input selection query
AVMT
Shutter control
AVMT ?
Shutter mode query
1 = Power ON
3 = Warm-up in progress
Parameters
11 = RGB1
12 =RGB2
21 = VIDEO
22 = S-VIDEO
31 = DVI-D
32 = AUX (only enabled if ET-MD77DV, ET-MD77SD1, ET-MD77SD3 or
ET-MD100SD4 is installed)
Parameters
30 = Shutter mode off (picture mute canceled)
31 = Shutter mode on (picture mute)
Error status query
Parameters
1st byte:
Indicates fan errors, range 0--2
2nd byte:
Indicates lamp errors, range 0--2
3rd byte:
Indicates temperature errors, range 0--2
4th byte:
Indicates cover open errors, range 0--2
5th byte:
Indicates filter errors, range 0--2
6th byte:
Indicates other errors, range 0--2
Definitions for each value from 0 to 2 are as follows.
0 = No error known
1 = Warning
2 = Error
LAMP ?
Lamp status query
Parameters
1st digits (1--5 digits): Lamp 1 cumulative operating time
2nd digit: 0 = Lamp 1 off, 1 = Lamp 1 on
3rd digits (1--5 digits): Lamp 2 cumulative operating time
4th digit: 0 = Lamp 2 off, 1 = Lamp 2 on
5th digits (1--5 digits): Lamp 3 cumulative operating time
6th digit: 0 = Lamp 3 off, 1 = Lamp 1 on
7th digits (1--5 digits): Lamp 4 cumulative operating time
8th digit: 0 = Lamp 4 off, 1 = Lamp 2 on
INST ?
Input selection list query
The following are returned as parameters.
“11 12 21 22 31” (If any of the ET-MD77DV, ET-MD77SD1, ET-MD77SD3 or
ET-MD100SD4 are installed, “11 12 21 22 31 32” is returned.)
NAME ?
Projector name query
The name set for “HOST NAME” in “NETWORK” is returned.
INF1 ?
Manufacturer name query
“Panasonic” is returned.
INF2 ?
Model name query
“D12000” or “DZ12000” is returned.
INFO ?
Other information query
Information such as version number is returned.
CLSS ?
Class information query
“1” is returned.
ERST?
Special Features
Command
„ PJLink™ security authorization
When using PJLink™ with security authorization, either of the password set for administrator privileges and
the password set for user privileges with Web browser control can be used as the password for PJLink™.
When using PJLink™ without security authorization, set use without the password for administrator privileges
and the password for user privileges of Web browser control.
• PJLink™ is a pending trademark in Japan, the United States, and other countries and regions.
For specifications regarding PJLink™, refer to the Japan Business Machine and Information System
Industries Association website.
URL: http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/
ENGLISH – 105
Using the serial terminals
The main unit is equipped with SERIAL terminals located in its connection terminals, and this terminal is compliant
with RS-232C/RS-422. Also a serial output terminal is provided to enable plural projector control.
Examples of connection
„ For RS-232C
z Single projector
D-Sub 9-pin (female)
PC
RS-232C IN
RS-422 IN
SERIAL
RS-422 OUT
Connection terminals on projector
D-Sub 9-pin (male)
Communication cable (straight)
z Multiple projectors
D-Sub 9-pin (female)
PC
RS-232C IN
D-Sub 9-pin
(male)
RS-422 IN
SERIAL
RS-232C IN
RS-422 OUT
Connection terminals
on projector 1
D-Sub 9-pin (female)
RS-422 IN
SERIAL
Connection terminals
on projector 2
D-Sub 9-pin (male)
D-Sub 9-pin (female) D-Sub 9-pin (male)
Communication cable (straight)
Communication cable (straight)
„ Pin assignments and signal names
D-Sub 9-pin
(female), external
appearance
Pin Signal
No. name
Description
1
NC
2
TXD
Send data
3
RXD
Receive data
4
5
Connected internally
GND
Ground
6
Serial input
terminal
NC
7
CTS
8
RTS
Connected internally
9
NC
„ Communication conditions (Factory setting)
Signal level
RS-232C-compliant
Synchronization method
Start-stop synchronization
Baud rate
9 600bps
Parity
None
Character length
8 bits
Stop bit
1 bit
X parameter
None
S parameter
None
106 – ENGLISH
D-Sub 9-pin
(male)
RS-422 OUT
„ For RS-422
z Single projector
D-Sub 9-pin (female)
PC
RS-232C IN
RS-422 IN
SERIAL
RS-422 OUT
Connection
terminals on
projector
D-Sub 9-pin (male)
Communication cable (straight)
z Multiple projectors
D-Sub 9-pin (female)
PC
RS-232C IN
D-Sub 9-pin
(male)
RS-422 IN
SERIAL
RS-422 OUT
D-Sub 9-pin (female)
RS-232C IN
RS-422 IN
SERIAL
Connection
terminals on
projector 1
D-Sub 9-pin
(male)
RS-422 OUT
Connection
terminals on
projector 2
D-Sub 9-pin (male) D-Sub 9-pin (female) D-Sub 9-pin (male)
Communication cable (straight) Communication cable (straight)
D-Sub 9-pin
(female), external
appearance
Serial input
terminal
Pin Signal
No. name
Description
1
NC
2
TXD(-) Data transmit terminal (-)
3
RXD(+) Data receive terminal (+)
D-Sub 9-pin
(male), external
appearance
Pin Signal
No. name
1
Description
NC
2
RXD(-) Data receive terminal (-)
3
TXD(+)
Data transmit terminal (+)
4
Connected internally
4
5
NC
5
NC
6
Connected internally
6
Connected internally
7
TXD(+)
8
RXD(-) Data receive terminal (-)
9
Data transmit terminal (+)
FG
Serial input
terminal
GND
„ Communication conditions (Factory setting)
Signal level
RS-422-compliant
Synchronization method
Start-stop synchronization
Baud rate
9 600bps
Parity
None
Character length
8 bits
Stop bit
1 bit
X parameter
None
S parameter
None
Connected internally
7
RXD(+) Data receive terminal (+)
8
TXD(-) Data transmit terminal (-)
9
FG
GND
Special Features
„ Pin assignments and signal names
ENGLISH – 107
Using the serial terminals (continued)
Basic format
Transmission from the computer begins with STX, then the ID, command, parameter, and ETX are sent in this
order. Add parameters according to the details of control.
STX
A D
(2 bytes)
Start
(1 byte)
I 1 I 2
;
C1
C2
C3
Two ID Semicolon
characters (1 byte)
(2 bytes)
ZZ, 1 to 64 and 0A to 0Z
ID designate
:
P1
P2
Pn
ETX
Colon
(1 byte)
3 command
characters
(3 bytes)
Parameter
(undefined length)
End
(1 byte)
Attention
• No command can be sent or received for 10 to 60 seconds after the lamp starts lighting. Try sending any
command after that period has elapsed.
• When transmitting multiple commands, be sure to wait until 0.5 seconds has elapsed after receiving the
response from the projector before sending the next command. When sending commands without parameters,
a colon (:) is not necessary.
Note
• When the wrong command is sent, the “ER401” or “ER402” status is sent from the projector to the personal
computer.
• Projector ID supported on the RS-232C interface is ZZ (ALL) and a group of 1 to 64 and 0A to 0Z.
• The “STX” character code is 02 and the “ETX” character code is 03.
• If a command is sent with a projector ID specified, the projector will return answer back only in the following
cases:
If it coincides with the projector ID
If the ID specification is ALL and responding (ID ALL) is on
If the ID specification is Group and responding (ID Group) is on
Control commands
When controlling the projector from a computer, the following commands are available:
Command Function of command
Remarks
In standby mode, commands other than “PON” are invalid.
• While the lamp is ON and being controlled, a “PON” command will not be
accepted.
PON
Power “ON”
POF
Power “OFF”
IIS
Switch input modes
QSL
Query for active lamp
mode
Parameter
0 = QUAD, 1 = L1/L4, 2 = L2/L3, 3 = DUAL, 4 = L1/L2/L3, 5 = L1/L2/L4,
6 = L1/L3/L4, 7 = L2/L3/L4, 8 = TRIPLE, 9 = L1, 10 = L2, 11 = L3, 12 = L4,
13 = SINGLE
Active lamp mode
Parameter
0 = QUAD, 1 = L1/L4, 2 = L2/L3, 3 = DUAL, 4 = L1/L2/L3, 5 = L1/L2/L4,
6 = L1/L3/L4, 7 = L2/L3/L4, 8 = TRIPLE, 9 = L1, 10 = L2, 11 = L3, 12 = L4,
13 = SINGLE
LPM
Parameter
VID = VIDEO
RG1 = RGB1
SVD = S-VIDEO DVI = DVI-D
RG2 = RGB2
AUX = AUX
Note
• If you need a detailed command list, please contact your dealer.
108 – ENGLISH
Cable specifications
„ Connecting to a PC
z For RS-232C
Computer (DTE
specifications)
Projector
1
NC
NC
1
2
2
3
3
4
NC
NC
4
5
5
6
NC
NC
6
7
7
8
8
9
NC
NC
9
„ When multiple projectors are connected
2nd
(RS-422 IN)
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
Attention
• To connect the computer to the SERIAL terminal, prepare an adequate communication cable that fits to your
personal computer.
Special Features
1st
(RS-422 OUT)
ENGLISH – 109
Using the Remote 2 terminal
Using the REMOTE 2 terminal provided on the connection terminals of the main unit, it is possible to operate the
projector from a control panel etc. furnished in a distant location where infrared remote control signal cannot be
received.
Example of a control panel layout
Remote terminal
External control
Remote terminal/External control
STANDBY
ON
LAMP
RGB1
VIDEO
RGB2
S-VIDEO
DVI-D
Projector set up in a meeting room
Control panel located in a different room
Pin assignments and control
Be sure to short-circuit Pins 1 and 9 when controlling.
Names of terminals
D-Sub 9-pin (female)
external appearance
Open (H)
Short (L)
1
GND
2
POWER
OFF
ON
3
RGB1
Other
RGB1
4
RGB2
Other
RGB2
5
VIDEO
Other
VIDEO
6
S-VIDEO
Other
S-VIDEO
7
DVI-D
Other
DVI-D
8
SHUTTER
OFF
ON
9
RST / SET
Controlled by
remote control
Controlled by
external contact
GND
Note
• The above figure shows the pin assignment and control details when “REMOTE2 MODE” (p. 80) is “DEFAULT”.
When using “REMOTE2 MODE” with “USER”, the pin assignment and control details are those set for “USER”.
• When pin 1 and pin 9 are short-circuited, the following buttons on the projector's control panel and on the
remote control cannot be used.
POWER button, SHUTTER button
In addition, the RS-232C commands and network functions that correspond to these functions cannot be used
either.
• When pin 1 and pin 9 are short-circuited and then any one of pins 3 to 7 is short-circuited to pin 1, the
following buttons on the projector's control panel and on the remote control cannot be used.
POWER button, input selection buttons (RGB1, RGB2, DVI-D, AUX, VIDEO, S-VIDEO), SHUTTER button
In addition, the RS-232C commands and network functions that correspond to these functions cannot be used
either.
110 – ENGLISH
Monitor Lamp Indicators
Five monitor lamps are provided at the top of main unit front to inform the user of the lamp replacement time and
unusual internal temperature. These lamps indicate the degree of abnormality by combination of blinking and/or
lighting lamps. Turn off the power and take the proper measure according to the table below.
LAMP 4 monitor (LAMP 4)
LAMP 2 monitor (LAMP 2)
Temperature monitor (TEMP)
OPEN
FILTER
CLEANING
CLOSE
LAMP 1 monitor (LAMP 1)
LAMP 3 monitor (LAMP 3)
Lamp
indication
Information
Warm-up status
Lighting in
red
High temperature
inside. (WARNING)
TEMP
monitor
Blinking in
red
(2 times)
High temperature
inside
(Standby condition)
Blinking in
red
(3 times)
Cooling fan has been
stopped.
Lighting in
red
Indicates the time for
replacing the lamp
unit.
LAMP
monitor
Blinking in
red
(3 times)
Error is detected in
the lamp circuit.
Check point
Remedial measure
• Did you turn on the
• Wait about five minutes in the current status.
power when the ambient
• Install the unit in a location having an
temperature was low
ambient temperature from 0 °
C to 45 °
C.
(approx. 0 °
C)?
• Check if the ventilation
port is blocked.
• Is the room air
temperature too high?
• Is the air filter blocked
with dust?
• Was the temperature
warning indication
displayed?
• Remove the object that is blocking the
ventilation port.
• Move the projector to a temperature of 0 °
C
to 45 ˚C and the humidity of 10 % to 80 %
(no condensation).
• Turn off the MAIN POWER switch using the
procedure on page 39 and clean the air filter.
(pp. 112-113)
• Turn off the main power supply (MAIN
POWER) switch in the procedure shown on
page 39 and consult the distributor.
• Did you notice a
“REPLACE THE LAMP”
message on the screen
when turning on the
projector power supply?
• This lamp monitor lights up when the lamp
unit used hours have reached 1 800 hours.
Request the dealer to replace the lamp unit.
• Did you turn the power
back on immediately
after turning it off?
• Wait until the lamp has cooled off, and then
turn on the power.
• Some error has arisen in
the lamp circuit.
• Check for fluctuation
(or drop) in the source
voltage.
• Turn off the MAIN POWER switch using
the procedure on page 39 and consult the
dealer.
Attention
Information
Name of
monitor
lamp
• Be sure to observe the procedure “Powering up the projector” (p. 38) and “Powering off the projector” (p. 39)
when performing power supply operation to take a measure to the indication of temperature monitor (TEMP)
lamp and lamp monitor (LAMP) lamp.
ENGLISH – 111
Cleaning and replacement of air filter
If the air filter is blocked with too much dust, the inside of the projector will become hot and the temperature
monitor (TEMP) indicator will flash and the power will turn off. The static electric mesh filter should be replaced
and the metal mesh filter and brush inside the filter unit should be cleaned after approximately 2 000 hours of use,
although this is a guide only and the actual time will vary depending on the operating conditions.
Procedure of cleaning
1. Turn off the main power and remove the power plug from the receptacle.
• Turn off the main power supply observing the procedure (How to turn “OFF” the power supply) on page 39
and then remove the power plug.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to
loosen the filter cleaning unit
fixing screw at the front of the
projector.
• Insert your hand into the base of the air filter
and pull the air filter forwards while removing
the filter cleaning unit from the projector.
3. Remove the static electric mesh
filter from the filter cleaning unit.
• Loosen the static electric mesh filter so that it
can be removed, and then remove it.
Static electric mesh filter
Filter cleaning
unit
Filter cleaning unit fixing screw
4. Place the filter cleaning unit
upside down.
Brush cover fixing screws (4 places)
5. Remove the four brush cover
fixing screws, and then remove
the brush cover and the movable
metal mesh filter from the filter
cleaning unit.
Brush cover
Movable metal mesh filter
6. Clean the filter cleaning unit,
brush and movable metal mesh
filter.
• Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any dust
blockages.
Movable metal mesh
filter
Brush cover
Brush
112 – ENGLISH
Brush Filter cleaning
unit
7. Install the movable metal mesh
filter to the filter cleaning unit.
Movable metal mesh filter
• When reassembling, align the edge of the
movable metal mesh filter with position A.
• Hook the movable metal mesh filter onto the
gear and the rail.
• The movable metal mesh filter will be set to the
correct position after the set is installed and the
power is turned on, so it can be installed in the
middle position during reassembly without any
problem.
8. Install the brush cover so that it
is aligned with the positioning
pin guide, and then tighten the
four brush cover fixing screws.
Rail
Brush cover fixing screws (4 places)
Pin guide
9. Install the new static electric
mesh filter to the filter cleaning
unit.
10. Insert the filter cleaning unit into
the projector, and then securely
tighten the filter cleaning unit
fixing screw.
• Install the air filter, and then install the filter
cleaning unit by carrying out removal step 2 in
reverse.
• The air filter must be installed before using the
projector. If the projector is used without the air filter
installed, foreign particles and dust will get inside
the projector and cause problems with operation.
Filter cleaning
unit
Static electric mesh filter
Filter cleaning unit fixing screw
Note
• If cleaning cannot remove the dust completely, then it is a sign to replace the static electric mesh filter. Consult
the dealer. In addition, when the lamp unit is replaced, also replace the static electric mesh filter.
• Do not wash the static electric mesh filter with water.
• Use a neutral detergent to clean off any oil from the movable metal mesh filter.
Information
Attention
ENGLISH – 113
Replacement of lamp unit
WARNING
•
•
•
•
Wait until the lamp is cooled sufficiently before replacing the lamp unit.
Make sure that all four lamp units are installed.
Replacement of the lamp unit should be carried out by a qualified technician.
Do not remove any screws (such as the black screws) other than those indicated when replacing the
lamp unit. If this is not observed, electric shocks, burns or other injuries may occur.
Precautions on lamp unit replacement
• Be careful when handling a light source lamp. The lamp unit has high internal pressure. If improperly handled,
failure might result.
• A used lamp unit may burst if it is handled violently. For disposition of used lamps, request an industrial waste
disposal contractor.
• If you continue to use a lamp after the replacement time, the lamp may break.
• Phillips screwdriver is necessary when replacing a lamp unit. Take care not to slip your hand when using a
screwdriver.
Attention
• A lamp unit is an optional part. Contact the dealer.
Replacement Lamp Unit model No.: ET-LAD12K (single bulb), ET-LAD12KF (4 bulbs)
Rating: 300 W
• Other lamps than specified above cannot be used. Be sure to use the specified lamp.
Timing of lamp unit replacement
The lamp used for the light source has its due life. The life of the lamp used in the main unit is 2 000 hours.
However, it may happen that the lamp becomes dead (will not light) by the time of 2 000 hours depending on the
characteristics of individual lamps and working conditions (lamp life is affected by the times of lighting and the
intervals between previous lighting and next lighting). Therefore, it is strongly recommended for the user to keep a
spare bulb.
If a lamp unit has not been replaced after 2 000 hours of operation have elapsed, the lamp will turn off
automatically. When the operating time for all of the lamps reaches 2 000 hours or more, the power will turn off
automatically approximately 10 minutes after it is turned on, and the projector will switch to standby mode.
Attention
• Clean and replace the air filter when replacing the lamp units. (pp. 112-113)
„ Indication after 1 800 hours
When lamp unit used hours have reached 1 800 hours, lamp monitor (LAMP1, LAMP2, LAMP3, or LAMP4)
light up including standby state.
Further, an on-screen indication will appear for about 30 seconds as shown in the diagram, recommending
replacement of lamp unit. (The indication will disappear after about 30 seconds or when either control button
on the main unit or remote control button is pressed.)
After 2 000 hours, the on-screen indication will not disappear unless the menu (MENU) button is pressed.
REPLACE THE LAMP
114 – ENGLISH
Procedure of lamp unit replacement
1. Turn the main power OFF, following the procedures described in
“Powering up the projector” (p. 38) and “Powering off the projector”
(p. 39), disconnect the power plug from the AC power source, and wait
for one hour or more. Then check that the lamp unit has cooled down.
2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to
loosen the lamp unit cover screw
at the rear of the projector until
the screw turns freely.
Lamp unit cover screw
3. Open the lamp unit cover and
remove it from the projector.
Lamp unit cover
4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to
loosen the three fixing screws for
the lamp unit to be replaced until
the screws turn freely. Hold the
handle of the lamp unit and gently
pull the lamp unit out from the
projector.
Fixing
screws
Handle
CAUTION
The lamp unit and structural parts around the
lamp unit will be hot immediately after the
projector has been used.
You might get burned if you touch it while it is still
hot.
Lamp unit 2
Lamp unit 1
Lamp unit 4
Lamp unit 3
5. Install the new lamp unit.
6. Use a Phillips screwdriver to securely tighten the 3 lamp unit fixing
screws for each lamp unit.
Lamp unit cover screw
Caution
• Firmly install the lamp unit and lamp unit cover. If not
installed firmly, a protection circuit will function and
the power will not be turned on.
Lamp unit cover
Information
7. Install and close the lamp unit
cover, and then use a Phillips
screwdriver to securely tighten
the lamp unit cover screw.
ENGLISH – 115
Notes when installing the ceiling mount bracket
When installing the ceiling mount bracket to the projector, install the accessory eye bolts and wires to the
projector. (The projector will still be safe if they are not used, however they will help prevent the possibility of
accidents caused by the projector falling down if the screws happen to become loose.)
Installation should be carried out by a qualified technician by following the procedure given below.
• Panasonic takes no responsibility for any losses or damage occurring as a result of using a ceiling mount
bracket not manufactured by Panasonic, or if damage to the projector occurs as a result of an inappropriate
location used for installing the ceiling mount bracket, even if the projector’s warranty period has not yet expired.
• Use a torque screwdriver or similar tool to tighten the screws. Do not use tools such as electric screwdrivers or
impact screwdrivers.
• Dispose of any used products as soon as possible by asking a qualified technician for assistance.
Attention
• Be sure to use the accessory eye bolts and wires.
Installation procedure
1. Place the projector on a soft cloth
with the base facing upward.
Adjustable feet
2. Turn the four adjustable feet
counterclockwise and remove
them from the projector.
The adjustable feet will be used if the projector is
installed normally, so store them safely.
3. Turn the four eye bolts clockwise
to install them to the projector.
Eye bolt
4. Install each of the four wires to
the four eye bolts.
5. Pull the four accessory wires from
the eye bolts to the ceiling in four
directions.
Eye bolt
Wire
116 – ENGLISH
Symptoms
… try to check the following points again.
Check point
Page
• Is the power cord securely plugged in the receptacle?
37
• Is the MAIN POWER switch put to the “O” position?
Power does not turn on
38-39
• Is power supply live at the receptacle?
37
• Is the temperature monitor (TEMP) lamp on the projector front lighting
or blinking?
111
• Is the lamp monitor (LAMP) lamp on the projector front lighting or
blinking?
111
• Is the lamp unit cover completely attached?
115
• Was operation of ID setting made in a correctly way?
18, 77
• Are all four lamp units installed?
114-115
• Is the screen image input connected in a correct manner?
No image appears on screen
28
• Are the settings of switching input signals correct?
48, 58-59
ー
• Is the device(s) connected to the projector working normally?
• Is the shutter or freeze function used?
48, 83
• Is the lens in focus?
Screen image is blurred
40
• Is the projection distance adequate?
22-24
ー
• Is the lens dirty?
• Is the projector installed in a suitable location?
Pale color / bad color tint
Remote control does not
function
20-21
• Are COLOR and TINT correctly adjusted?
55
• Is the device(s) connected to the projector adjusted correctly?
ー
• Are dry batteries consumed?
ー
• Is polarity correct in battery setting?
17
• Are there any obstacle between the remote control and the beam
receiving window?
17
• Are you trying to operate the remote control beyond the effective
range?
17
• Is the remote 2 (REMOTE2) terminal used for external control?
110
• Is any external light interfering with the remote control operation?
• Was operation of ID setting made in a correctly way?
18, 77
• Is the LOCK button of the remote control at the lock position?
13
• Is the input selector set to correct position?
Abnormal image on the screen
48, 58-59
• Is the correct signaling system selected?
58-59
• Are there any malfunctions on the source side, such as bad video tape?
• Are you supplying a signal that is not compatible with the projector?
Images from PC are not
projected
Pictures from the DVI-D output
graphics board of a computer
are not projected
ー
ー
122-123
• Is the cable too long?
ー
• Is the correct signal destination set for notebook computer screen
image?
ー
• Use Fn and F3 keys for setting. (For details, refer to the instruction
manual of the computer.)
ー
• Is DVI-D IN or AUX DVI IN set to “EDID2 (PC)”?
73-74
• The problem may be solved by updating the driver for the graphics
board to the latest driver.
ー
Information
Before asking for service
ENGLISH – 117
Self-diagnosis display
There is a self-diagnosis display located on the side of the projector (p. 15) for automatically displaying the
corresponding details when an error or warning occurs.
Self-diagnosis
display
Details
Remedy
U04
Air filter is blocked
U11
Intake air temperature warning
U12
Optical module temperature warning
U13
Lamp ambient temperature warning
U14
Low temperature warning
• Ambient temperature is too low.
U15
The ambient temperature is 40 °
C or more,
so light output is being limited to protect the
projector.
• If 100% brightness is required, use the projector
where the ambient temperature is less than 40 °
C
(35 °
C in high altitude mode).
U21
Intake air temperature error
U22
Optical module temperature error
U23
Lamp ambient temperature error
U24
Low temperature error
U41
Lamp 1 operating time warning
U42
Lamp 2 operating time warning
U43
Lamp 3 operating time warning
U44
Lamp 4 operating time warning
U51
Lamp 1 error
U52
Lamp 2 error
U53
Lamp 3 error
U54
Lamp 4 error
U61
Lamp 1 : 2 000 hour operating time exceeded
U62
Lamp 2 : 2 000 hour operating time exceeded
U63
Lamp 3 : 2 000 hour operating time exceeded
U64
Lamp 4 : 2 000 hour operating time exceeded
U70
Air filter unit not installed
U71
Lamp 1 not installed
U72
Lamp 2 not installed
U73
Lamp 3 not installed
U74
Lamp 4 not installed
U81
AC power supply voltage drop warning (less
than 90 V)
• AC power supply voltage input has dropped. Check
that there is sufficient electrical wiring capacity for the
projector’s power consumption requirements.
U91
Lamp unit cover is not closed
• Close the lamp unit cover.
H01
Internal clock battery replacement
• The battery needs to be replaced. Consult your
dealer.
H11
Air intake temperature sensor not found
H12
Optical module temperature sensor not found
H13
Lamp ambient temperature sensor not found
H18
Clogged filter sensor not found
F11
Shutter error
F12
Dynamic iris error
F13
Air filter unit error
F21
2.5 V DC error
F22
3.3 V DC error
F23
5.0 V DC error
118 – ENGLISH
• Clean the air filter unit.
• Ambient temperature is too high.
• Ambient temperature is too high.
• Ambient temperature is too low.
• The lamp replacement period has arrived. Replace
the lamp.
• Lamp has not turned on. Wait for the lamp to cool
down and then turn the power back on. If the lamp
still does not turn on, contact your dealer.
• The lamp has exceeded its replacement period.
Replace the lamp straight away.
• Install the air filter unit.
• Install the lamp.
• If turning the main power off and back on again does
not clear the error display, consult your dealer.
Details
F41
Lamp 1 memory error
F42
Lamp 2 memory error
F43
Lamp 3 memory error
F44
Lamp 4 memory error
F61
Ballast 1 communication error
F62
Ballast 2 communication error
F63
Ballast 3 communication error
F64
Ballast 4 communication error
F80
Resize IC setting error
F81
FM-R test error
F82
FM-G test error
F83
FM-B test error
F91
FPGA1 configuration error
F92
FPGA2 configuration error
F93
Flash ROM error
F94
RAM error
F95
FPGA expansion error
F96
Lens shift error
F97
Geometry correction board communication
error
FE1
Power supply fan error
FE2
Lamp 1 fan error
FE3
Lamp 2 fan error
FE4
Lamp 3 fan error
FE5
Lamp 4 fan error
FE6
Ballast circuit 1 fan error
FE7
Ballast circuit 3 fan error
FE8
GB-DMD fan error
FE9
Center exhaust fan error
FF0
Left exhaust fan error
FF1
Right exhaust fan error
FF2
Red DMD cooling fan error
FF3
Green DMD cooling fan error
FF4
Blue DMD cooling fan error
FF5
Color prism fan error
FF6
Lamp prism fan error
FF7
Ballast circuit 2 fan error
FF8
Ballast circuit 4 fan error
FF9
G prism fan error
Remedy
• Problem with lamp. Consult your dealer.
• If turning the main power off and back on again does
not clear the error display, consult your dealer.
Note
• The self-diagnosis display and details of the failure may sometimes differ.
Information
Self-diagnosis
display
ENGLISH – 119
Specifications
Model No.
PT-D12000U
Power supply
Power consumption
PT-DZ12000U
120 - 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
1 600W−1 500W (about 10 W (120V AC) / 15 W (240V AC) in standby)
Amps
16 A−9.0 A
Panel size
®
DLP Chip
0.95 inch (aspect ratio 4:3)
Three-unit DLP chip, DLP® type
Display system
Number of pixels
0.96 inch (aspect ratio 16:10)
®
3 × 1 470 000 pixels (1 400 × 1 050 dots)
Lens
(Powered zoom/
Powered focus control)
Option
Projection lamp
4 bulbs × 300 W UHM lamp
Optical output
For video
signal (S-video
included)
For RGB signal
3 × 2 304 000 pixels (1 920 × 1 200 dots)
12 000 lm (ANSI)
Horizontally 15.75 kHz/15.63 kHz, vertically 60 Hz/50 Hz
Horizontally 15 kHz–100 kHz, vertically 24 Hz–120 Hz,
Panasonic Intelligent Auto Scanning (PIAS) system
Dot clock frequency 20 MHz–162 MHz
For DVI-D signal
For YPBPR signal
[480i]
horizontally 15.73 kHz, vertically 59.94 Hz
[480p]
horizontally 31.5 kHz, vertically 59.94 Hz
[576i]
horizontally 15.63 kHz, vertically 50 Hz
[576p]
horizontally 31.25 kHz, vertically 50 Hz
[720/50p]
horizontally 37.5 kHz, vertically 50 Hz
[720/60p]
horizontally 45 kHz, vertically 60 Hz
[1 035/60i]
horizontally 33.75 kHz, vertically 60 Hz
[1 080/60i]
horizontally 33.75 kHz, vertically 60 Hz
[1 080/50i]
horizontally 28.13 kHz, vertically 50 Hz
[1 080/24p] horizontally 27 kHz, vertically 24 Hz
[1 080/30p] horizontally 33.75 kHz, vertically 30 Hz
[1 080/25p] horizontally 28.13 kHz, vertically 25 Hz
[1 080/24sF] horizontally 27 kHz, vertically 48 Hz
[1 080/60p] horizontally 67.5 kHz, vertically 60 Hz
[1 080/50p] horizontally 56.25 kHz, vertically 50 Hz
• HD/SYNC, VD terminals are not compliant with 3 value composite SYNC.
Applicable
scanning
frequency
Color system
7 standards (NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-N/PAL-M/SECAM/PAL60)
70 inch–600 inch*1
Screen size
Screen aspect ratio
Projection scheme
Contrast ratio
(full white/full black)
Input module
connection slot
Interface
ports
Displayable resolution : VGA-WUXGA
(non-interlace)
Dot clock frequency :
25 MHz-162 MHz
• The WUXGA signals support only VESA
CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking) signals.
480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/59.94p,
720/50p, 1 080/60p, 1 080/59.94p,
1 080/50p, 1 080/60i, 1 080/59.94i,
1 080/50i, 1 080/24sF, 1 080/23.98sF,
1 080/30p, 1 080/29.97p, 1 080/25p,
1 080/24p, 1 080/23.98p
RGB1 input
terminal
120 – ENGLISH
4:3
16:10
Menu-selectable from front/rear/ceiling mount, and floor mounting
5 000:1 (when “DYNAMIC IRIS” has been set to “3”)
One system
1 set, BNC × 5
[For YPBPR input]
Y: 1.0 V[p-p] synchronization signal included, PBPR: 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω
[For RGB input]
0.7 V[p-p] 75 Ω For G-SYNC: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω
HD/SYNC: 75 Ω, 1.4–5 Vp-p, positive/negative polarity automatically adjusted
VD: 75 Ω, 1.4–5 Vp-p, positive/negative polarity automatically adjusted
Model No.
RGB2 input
terminal
Video input/
output terminal
S-video input
terminal
PT-DZ12000U
1 set of high-density, D-sub 15p (female)
[For YPBPR input]
Y: 1.0 V [p-p] synchronization signal included, PBPR: 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω
[For RGB input]
0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω For G-SYNC: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω
HD/SYNC: TTL, high-impedance, positive/negative polarity automatically adjusted
VD: TTL, high-impedance, positive/negative polarity automatically adjusted
• HD/SYNC, and VD terminals are not compliant with 3-value direct SYNC.
1 set BNC
1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω (Active through for Video output)
1 set Mini DIN 4p
Y 1.0 V [p-p] C 0.286 V [p-p] 75 Ω Compliant with S1 signals
DVI-D input
terminal
1 set
DVI 1.0 compliant
HDCP (Single link only) compatible
LAN terminal
1 set (Used for network connection)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
PJLink™ compatible
Serial input
terminal
Serial output
terminal
Remote1 input/
output terminal
Remote2 terminal
2 sets D-sub 9-pin (female), RS-232C/RS-422 compliant
Used for personal computer control
1 set D-sub 9-pin (male), RS-422 compliant
Used for personal computer control
1 set each for M3 pin jack
Wired remote control, used for link control
D-sub 9p (female)
Used for external control
Length of power supply cord
3.0 m (9.1´)
Cabinet
Molded resin
Outside dimensions
*2
Weight
approx. 35 kg (77.1 lb) (without optional projection lens)
Working environment
condition
Power source
Remote
control
Width: 578 mm (22.8˝), Height : 320 mm (12.6˝), Depth: 643 mm (25.3˝)
Operation range
Mass
Outside dimensions
Ambient temperature*3 : 0 °
C to 45 °
C
Ambient humidity: 10 % to 80 % (no condensation)
3 V DC (two AA dry cells)
approx. 30 m (98´5˝) (in front of beam receiver)
134 g (0.31 lb) (including dry cells)
Width: 51 mm (2˝), Thickness: 23 mm (0.9˝), Depth: 176 mm (6.9˝)
Hanging attachment (For high ceiling):
Hanging attachment (For low ceiling):
Projection lens:
Optional
DVI-D input module:
SD-SDI input module:
HD/SD-SDI input module:
Dual link HD/SD-SDI input module:
Replacement Lamp Unit:
ET-PKD100H
ET-PKD100S
ET-D75LE1, ET-D75LE2, ET-D75LE3,
ET-D75LE4, ET-D75LE5, ET-D75LE6,
ET-D75LE8
ET-MD77DV
ET-MD77SD1
ET-MD77SD3
ET-MD100SD4
ET-LAD12K (single bulb),
ET-LAD12KF (4 bulbs)
*1 70˝ – 300˝ for ET-D75LE5
*2 This is the average value. It may differ depending on each product.
*3 When the projector is used in high altitude mode (1 400 to 2 700 m), the ambient temperature is 0 °
C to 40 °
C.
Furthermore, if the ambient temperature becomes 40 °
C or more (35 °
C in high altitude mode) when using the
projector with lamp 4 lit, light output may be reduced by approximately 30% to protect the projector.
When a smoke cut filter is used, the ambient temperature is 0 °
C to 35 °
C. However, use at high altitudes is not
possible.
Information
Interface
ports
PT-D12000U
ENGLISH – 121
Appendix
Compatible Signals
The following table specifies the types of RGB/YPBPR/DVI-D signals compatible with the projector.
RGB signals can also be input within the range of fH=15 kHz–100 kHz, fV=24 Hz–120 Hz, dot clock=20 MHz–162 MHz.
DVI-D signals can also be input within the range of dot clock=25 MHz -162 MHz.
Display mode
Number of
displayed dots
Scanning
frequency
H (kHz)
V (Hz)
Dot clock
frequency
(MHz)
Plug and play
Format
RGB2
DVI-D DVI-D
EDID1 EDID2
NTSC/NTSC4.43/
PAL-M/PAL60
720 × 480i
15.7
59.9
VIDEO/S-VIDEO
PAL/PAL-N/SECAM
720 × 576i
15.6
50
VIDEO/S-VIDEO
480i
720 × 480i
15.7
59.9
13.5
576i
720 × 576i
15.6
50
13.5
YPbPr/RGB
480p
720 × 483
31.5
59.9
27
YPbPr/RGB/DVI
⃝
YPbPr/RGB
576p
720 × 576
31.3
50
27
YPbPr/RGB/DVI
⃝
1 080/60i
1 920 × 1 080i
33.8
60
74.3
YPbPr/RGB/DVI
⃝
1 080/50i
1 920 × 1 080i
28.1
50
74.3
YPbPr/RGB/DVI
⃝
1 080/24p
1 920 × 1 080
27
24
74.3
YPbPr/RGB/DVI
⃝
1 080/24sF
1 920 × 1 080i
27
24
74.3
YPbPr/RGB/DVI
⃝
1 080/25p
1 920 × 1 080
28.1
25
74.3
YPbPr/RGB/DVI
1 080/30p
1 920 × 1 080
33.8
30
74.3
YPbPr/RGB/DVI
1 080/60p
1 920 × 1 080
67.5
60
148.5
YPbPr/RGB/DVI
⃝
1 080/50p
1 920 × 1 080
56.3
50
148.5
YPbPr/RGB/DVI
⃝
720/60p
1 280 × 720
45
60
74.3
YPbPr/RGB/DVI
⃝
720/50p
1 280 × 720
37.5
50
74.3
YPbPr/RGB/DVI
⃝
640 × 400
31.5
70.1
25.2
RGB/DVI
640 × 400
37.9
85.1
31.5
RGB/DVI
640 × 480
31.5
59.9
25.2
RGB/DVI
640 × 480
35
66.7
30.2
RGB/DVI
640 × 480
37.9
72.8
31.5
RGB/DVI
⃝
⃝
640 × 480
37.5
75
31.5
RGB/DVI
⃝
⃝
640 × 480
43.3
85
36
RGB/DVI
800 × 600
35.2
56.3
36
RGB/DVI
⃝
⃝
800 × 600
37.9
60.3
40
RGB/DVI
⃝
⃝
800 × 600
48.1
72.2
50
RGB/DVI
⃝
⃝
800 × 600
46.9
75.0
56.3
RGB/DVI
⃝
⃝
800 × 600
53.7
85.1
56.3
RGB/DVI
832 × 624
49.7
74.6
57.3
RGB/DVI
⃝
⃝
1 024 × 768
39.6
50
51.9
RGB/DVI
1 024 × 768
48.4
60
65
RGB/DVI
⃝
⃝
1 024 × 768
56.5
70.1
75
RGB/DVI
⃝
⃝
⃝
⃝
VGA400
VGA480
SVGA
MAC16
XGA
MXGA
122 – ENGLISH
1 024 × 768
60
75
78.8
RGB/DVI
1 024 × 768
65.5
81.6
86
RGB/DVI
1 024 × 768
68.7
85
94.5
RGB/DVI
1 024 × 768i
35.5
87
44.9
RGB
1 024 × 768
80
100
105
RGB/DVI
1 024 × 768
96.7
120
130
RGB/DVI
1 152 × 864
64
71.2
94.2
RGB/DVI
1 152 × 864
67.5
74.9
108
RGB/DVI
1 152 × 864
76.7
85
121.5
RGB/DVI
⃝
⃝
⃝
⃝
Display mode
MAC21
1 280 × 768
1 280 × 800
MSXGA
Number of
displayed dots
Scanning
frequency
Plug and play
Dot clock
frequency
(MHz)
Format
H (kHz)
V (Hz)
RGB2
1 152 × 870
68.7
75.1
100
RGB/DVI
1 280 × 768
39.6
49.9
65.3
RGB/DVI
1 280 × 768
47.8
59.9
79.5
RGB/DVI
1 280 × 800
41.3
50
68
RGB/DVI
1 280 × 800
49.7
59.8
83.5
RGB/DVI
RGB/DVI
1 280 × 960
60
60
108
1 280 × 1 024
52.4
50
88
RGB/DVI
1 280 × 1 024
64
60
108
RGB/DVI
1 280 × 1 024
72.3
66.3
125
RGB/DVI
1 280 × 1 024
78.2
72
135.1
RGB/DVI
1 280 × 1 024
80
75
135
RGB/DVI
1 280 × 1 024
91.1
85
157.5
RGB/DVI
1 400 × 1 050
65.2
60
122.6
RGB/DVI
1 400 × 1 050
78.8
72
149.3
RGB/DVI
1 400 × 1 050
82.2
75
155.9
RGB/DVI
WXGA+
1 440 × 900
55.9
59.9
106.5
RGB/DVI
UXGA
1 600 × 1 200
75
60
162
RGB/DVI
WSXGA+
1 680 × 1 050
65.3
60
146.3
RGB/DVI
1 920 × 1 080*1
1 920 × 1 080
66.6
59.9
138.5
RGB/DVI
1 920 × 1 200
74
60
154
RGB/DVI
SXGA
SXGA+
*1
WUXGA
DVI-D DVI-D
EDID1 EDID2
⃝
⃝
⃝
⃝
⃝
⃝
⃝
⃝
⃝
⃝
⃝
⃝
*1: Only when using VESA CVT RB (Reduced Blanking)
Note
Information
• The number of display dots of the PT-D12000U is 1 400 x 1 050, and the number of display dots of the
PT-DZ12000U is 1 920 x 1 200. A signal of a different resolution than the above data is converted to the number
of display dots and then displayed.
• Character “i” that follows the number of displayed dots stands for interlace signal.
• Flicker (line flicker) will be caused in images if interlace signals are connected.
ENGLISH – 123
Appendix (continued)
List of P IN P
RGB1
Subwindow
RGB2
DVI
S-VIDEO
input
Moving
image
system*3
RGB
system*4
○
○
○
○
×
×
○
×
○
○
○
○
YPbPr
input
RGB
input
YPbPr
input
RGB input
×
×
×
×
YPbPr input
×
×
×
×
×
RGB input
×
×
×
×
○
RGB1
RGB2
ET-MD77DV
VIDEO
input
RGB
input
Main window
AUX
ETET-MD77SD3/
MD77SD1 ET-MD100SD4*1
○
Moving
image
*2
system
RGB
system*4
○
○
×
×
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
○
×
×
×
○
VIDEO input
○
×
○
×
×
×
×
○
×
×
×
○
S-VIDEO input
YPbPr input
DVI
○
×
○
×
×
×
×
○
×
×
×
○
Moving image system*3
○
×
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
○
RGB system*4
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
○
○
○
○
ET-MD77SD1
○
×
○
×
×
×
×
○
×
×
×
×
ET-MD77SD3/
ET-MD100SD4*1
○
×
○
×
×
×
×
○
×
×
×
×
Moving
image
system*2
○
×
○
×
×
×
×
○
×
×
×
×
RGB
system*4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
AUX
ETMD77DV
○: P IN P (Picture in Picture) combinations are enabled
×: P IN P (Picture in Picture) combinations are disabled
*1 Only 480i, 576i, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1 035/60i, 1 080/60i, 1 080/50i, 1 080/24sF, 1 080/30p, 1 080/25p, and
1 080/24p are supported.
*2 Only 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1 080/60i, 1 080/50i, 1 080/24sF, 1 080/30p, 1 080/25p, 1 080/24p,
1 080/60p, and 1 080/50p are supported.
*3 Only 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1 080/60i, 1 080/50i, 1 080/24sF, 1 080/24p, 1 080/25p, 1 080/30p,
1 080/50p, and 1 080/60p are supported.
*4 VGA (640 × 480) - WUXGA (1 920 × 1 200)
non-interlace signal, Dot clock frezuency : 25 MHz - 162 MHz
• The WUXGA signals support only VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking) signals.
Note
• Noise reduction cannot be used.
• For the PT-DZ12000U, the picture quality of the sub-window may deteriorate when the resolution of the input
signals of the sub-window are XGA (1 024 × 768) or better and the size of the sub-window is 50 % or larger.
124 – ENGLISH
Dimensions
Outside dimensions
OPEN
FILTER
CLEANING
OFF
AC IN
ON
CLOSE
MAIN POWER
578 (22.8˝)
Information
320 (12.6˝)
643 (25.3˝)
unit : mm (inch)
ENGLISH – 125
Index
Be sure to read the “IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE” and
the “Precautions with regard to safety”. (pp. 4-9)
A
F
Accessories ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 10
Adjusting Brightness ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 55
Adjusting Color ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 55
Adjusting color matching ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 70
Adjusting Contrast ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 54
Adjusting the aspect ratio ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 61
Adjusting the clamp position ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 65
Adjusting the color temperature ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 55
Adjusting the feet ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 20
Adjusting the geometry ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 62
Adjusting the input resolution ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 65
Adjusting the zoom ratio ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 62
Adjusting Tint ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 55
Air filter cleaning ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 81
Altitude Mode ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 78
Automatic adjustment ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 49
Auto power off ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 82
AUX DVI IN ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 74
AUX SDI IN ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 74
Frame delay・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 67
B
Back Color・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 75
Basic operations on menu screen ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 53
Before asking for service ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 117
Blanking adjustment ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 64
C
Changing the security password ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 89
Changing the text ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 89
Cleaning and replacement of air filter ・・・・・・・・・・・ 112
Clock phase adjustment ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 62
Compatible Signals ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 122
Connecting the power cord ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 37
Connecting with personal computers・・・・・・・・・・・・ 29
Connecting with VIDEO devices ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 28
Control device setup ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 90
D
Digital cinema reality ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 64
Direction・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 78
DVI-D IN ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 73
DVI-D input module ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 35
Dynamic iris setting ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 57
E
Edge blending adjustment ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 66
Effective range of remote control operation ・・・・・・ 17
126 – ENGLISH
G
Gamma setting ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 56
H
HD/SD-SDI input module ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 33
How to adjust the lens・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 40
How to install and remove the projection lens ・・・・ 36
I
Indication of monitor lamp ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 111
Initialize ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 84
Installation dimensions diagram ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 26
Installation Setting ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 78
Installing the input module ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 30
L
Lamp relay ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 80
Lamp select ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 79
Lamp unit replacement ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 115
Large Screen Correction ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 72
List of P IN P ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 124
Load all user data・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 84
M
Main menu ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 51
Maintenance ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 11
N
Network connections・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 93
Network control ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 92
Network function ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 91
Network standby ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 91
Network status ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 92
Noise reduction setting ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 57
Notes when installing the ceiling mount bracket ・ 116
O
On-screen display function ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 48
On-Screen display setting ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 75
Outside dimensions ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 125
P
P IN P ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 85
Power indicator lamp・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 37
Powering off the projector ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 39
Powering up the projector ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 38
Projection scheme ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 20
R
Raster position ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 68
Registered signals ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 45
Registering the picture mode settings as
presettings ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 58
Remote2 mode ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 80
Remote 2 terminal ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 110
RGB IN ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 72
RS-232C setting ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 80
S
Save all user data ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 83
Screen setting ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 72
SD-SDI input module・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 33
Self-diagnosis display ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 118
Serial terminals ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 106
Service password ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 84
Setting a projector ID・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 77
Setting FUNC1 ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 83
Setting projector ID number to remote control ・・・・ 18
Setting the date and time ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 83
Setting the security password ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 88
Setting the text ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 89
Sharpness setting ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 57
Shift adjustment ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 60
Specifications ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 120
sRGB ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 59
Startup logo ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 76
Status ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 81
Status function ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 48
Sub memory ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 46
Sub menu ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 51
Switching the input signal・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 48
Switching the picture mode ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 54
System daylight view setting ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 56
System selector ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 58
T
Test pattern ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 87
U
W
Wired remote control ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 18
Information
Using the PJLink™ protocol ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 105
Using the SHUTTER function ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 48
ENGLISH – 127
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
These symbols are only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the
correct method of disposal.
Note:
Purchase of this equipment includes the rights to use this software (the built-in microcomputer and information
recorded on ROMs) but does not grant copyrights. Do not reverse engineer, change or modify the software.
The guarantee will not be valid for any malfunctions caused by such actions.
Trademark Acknowledgement
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Digital Light Processing, DLP, and DLP® CHIP are registered trademarks of the Texas Instruments.
VGA and XGA are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
S-VGA is a registered trademark of the Video Electronics Standards Association.
“Microsoft Windows” is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation (U.S.A.) in the U.S. and other
countries.
“Netscape” and “Netscape Navigator” are registered trademarks of the Netscape Communications
Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are the trademarks or registered trademarks
of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Patent No. 5,717,422
All other trademarks are the property of the various trademark owners.
128 – ENGLISH
NOTES IMPORTANTES CONCERNANT LA SÉCURITÉ
AVERTISSEMENT:
POUR RÉDUIRE LES RISQUES DE FEU OU DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE, NE PAS EXPOSER
CE PRODUIT À L’EAU OU À L’HUMIDITÉ
Le symbole de la flèche en forme d’éclair, dans un triangle, avertit
l’usager de la présence de “tensions dangereuses” à l’intérieur du produit
qui peuvent être de force suffisante pour constituer un risque de choc
éIectrique aux personnes.
Le point d’exclamation dans un triangle avertit l’usager de la présence
d’instructions importantes concernant l’utilisation et l’entretien (réparation)
dans la littérature accompagnant le produit.
ATTENTION:
Ne pas retirer
AVERTISSEMENT:
Ne peut être utilisé dans une salle d’ordinateurs telle que définie dans la norme ANSI/NFPA 75 Standard for
Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment.
Information
Cet appareil est équipé d’une fiche de courant à trois broches avec
mise à la terre. Ne pas retirer la broche de mise à la masse de la fiche.
Cette fiche ne pourra être utilisée que dans une prise avec mise à la
terre. Ceci est une précaution sécuritaire. S’il est impossible d’insérer
la fiche dans la prise, s’adresser à un éIectricien. Ne pas annuler la
protection de la fiche à mise à la terre.
FRANÇAIS – 129
Précautions de sécurité
AVERTISSEMENT
„ En cas de problème (comme par exemple une absence d’image) ou si
vous remarquez que de la fumée ou une odeur suspecte s’échappe du
projecteur, couper immédiatement l’alimentation du projecteur, puis
débrancher le cordon d’alimentation de la prise du secteur.
• Ne pas continuer d’utiliser le projecteur dans ces cas, autrement cela peut entraîner un incendie ou des
chocs électriques.
• Après s’être assuré que de la fumée ne se dégage plus, s’adresser à un centre technique agréé et
demander que les réparations nécessaires soient faites.
• Le fait de réparer le projecteur soi-même est très dangereux, et ne doit jamais être fait.
„ Ne pas installer ce projecteur dans un endroit qui n’est pas assez
résistant pour supporter le poids du projecteur.
• Si l’emplacement d’installation n’est pas assez résistant, le projecteur risque de tomber et de causer de
graves blessures et (ou) des dommages.
• Demander à un technicien qualifié d’installer le projecteur par exemple s’il est installé au plafond.
• Si l’installation n’est pas faite correctement, cela peut entraîner des blessures ou des chocs électriques.
„ En cas de pénétration de corps étrangers ou d’éclaboussures à
l’intérieur du projecteur, de chute du projecteur ou de brisure du
boîtier, couper immédiatement l’alimentation, puis débrancher le
cordon d’alimentation de la prise du secteur.
• Si l’on continue d’utiliser le projecteur dans ces conditions, cela peut entraîner un incendie ou des chocs
électriques.
• S’adresser à un centre technique agréé pour que les réparations nécessaires puissent être faites.
„ Ne jamais recouvrir le filtre à air, l’orifice d’admission d’air et les
orifices de ventilation.
• Cela risque de faire surchauffer le projecteur, et causer un incendie ou endommager le projecteur.
„ Ne pas surcharger la prise du secteur.
• Si l’alimentation est surchargée (par exemple, par l’utilisation de trop d’adaptateurs), cela risque de faire
surchauffer le projecteur et peut entraîner un incendie.
„ Ne pas retirer le capot ou le modifier.
• L’intérieur du projecteur, soumis à des tensions élevées, présente en effet un grand danger d’incendies
ou de chocs électriques.
• Pour toute inspection, réglage ou réparation, s’adresser à un centre technique agréé.
„ Nettoyer régulièrement le cordon d’alimentation afin d’éviter qu’il ne se
recouvre de trop de poussières.
• En effet, une trop importante accumulation de poussières au niveau de la fiche du cordon d’alimentation
présente un risque d’endommagement de l’isolation électrique de la prise, ce qui pourrait causer un
incendie. Retirer le cordon d’alimentation avant de le nettoyer à l’aide d’un linge sec.
• Toujours débrancher le cordon d’alimentation de la prise du secteur lorsque le projecteur ne sera pas
utilisé pendant une période prolongée.
„ Toute manipulation ou procédure risquant d’endommager le cordon ou
la fiche du cordon d’alimentation est strictement interdite.
• Ne jamais endommager le cordon d’alimentation, ou l’altérer de quelque forme que ce soit, le placer à
proximité de sources de chaleur, le plier, le tordre excessivement, tirer dessus, placer des objets lourds
dessus ou le rembobiner.
• Il est possible que des chocs électriques, des courts-circuits ou un incendie soient produits par tout
endommagement du cordon d’alimentation.
• Contacter un centre de service autorisé pour toute réparation du cordon d’alimentation qui s’avèrerait
nécessaire.
130 – FRANÇAIS
„ Ne jamais manipuler la fiche du cordon avec les mains mouillées.
• Cela peut entraîner des chocs électriques.
„ Introduire fermement la fiche du cordon d’alimentation dans une prise
du secteur.
• Si la fiche n’est pas complètement insérée, cela peut entraîner des chocs électriques ou la faire
surchauffer.
• Ne jamais utiliser des fiches endommagées ou des prises murales incorrectement montées.
„ Ne pas placer le projecteur sur des surfaces instables.
• Si le projecteur est placé sur une surface qui est inclinée ou instable, il risque de tomber ou de se
renverser et cela pourrait causer des blessures ou des dommages.
„ Ne pas placer le projecteur dans l’eau et ne pas le laisser se mouiller.
• Sinon cela peut causer un incendie ou des chocs électriques.
„ Ne jamais démonter la lampe.
• Toute rupture de la lampe risquerait en effet de causer de graves blessures.
„ Ne pas placer des récipients contenant des liquides sur le projecteur.
• Si de l’eau se renverse sur le projecteur ou pénètre dans celui-ci, il y aura risque d’incendie ou
d’électrocution.
• Si de l’eau entre à l’intérieur du projecteur, contacter un centre technique agréé.
„ Ne pas mettre d’objets étrangers dans le projecteur.
• Ne pas insérer d’objets métalliques ou inflammables dans les orifices de ventilation ou les faire tomber
sur le projecteur, car cela peut causer un incendie ou des chocs électriques.
„ Après avoir retiré la pile de la télécommande, la tenir hors de portée
des enfants.
• La pile risque en effet de causer une mort par asphyxie si elle est avalée.
• Rechercher immédiatement le secours d’un médecin si la pile a été avalée par quelqu’un.
„ Ne jamais laisser les bornes + et – de la pile entrer en contact avec des
objets métalliques, tels que des colliers ou des barrettes par exemple.
• En effet, ceci risquerait de causer une fuite du courant de la pile, voire une surchauffe, une explosion ou
même un incendie.
• Conserver la pile dans un sac en plastique, à l’écart de tout objet métallique.
„ Isoler la pile avec du ruban adhésif ou autre matériau similaire avant de
la mettre au rebut.
• La pile risquerait en effet de prendre feu ou même d’exploser en cas de contact avec d’autres objets
métalliques ou des piles.
„ Le remplacement de la lampe ne devrait être confié qu’à un technicien
qualifié.
„ En cas d’installation au plafond, s’assurer d’utiliser le fil accessoire
(à installer à un endroit différent que le support de montage au plafond)
ainsi que les oeillets correspondants, en tant que mesure de sécurité
supplémentaire visant à empêcher toute chute du projecteur.
• Des accidents pourraient en effet être causés par une mauvaise fixation du projecteur.
„ Ne pas placer plusieurs kits les uns sur les autres.
• Des accidents pourraient être causés par un non-respect de cette mise en garde.
Information
• L’unité de la lampe est soumise à de très fortes pressions internes. Une mauvaise manipulation
risquerait d’entraîner une défaillance.
• La lampe risque en effet de s’endommager très facilement en cas de chute ou de choc violent, ce qui
pourrait causer des blessures ou des défaillances.
FRANÇAIS – 131
Précautions de sécurité (suite)
„ N’utilisez pas le projecteur lorsque le couvercle de l’objectif est
encore attaché à l’objectif (vendu séparément).
• Dans le cas contraire, un incendie risque de se produire.
„ Ne pas regarder directement dans l’objectif pendant que le projecteur
fonctionne.
• Une lumière intense est émise par l’objectif du projecteur. Si l’on regarde directement dans cette
lumière, elle risque de causer des blessures et de graves lésions occulaires.
„ Ne placez pas votre peau sur le trajet du faisceau lumineux lorsque
vous utilisez le projecteur.
• Une lumière intense est émise par l’objectif du projecteur. Si vous vous placez directement dans cette
lumière, elle peut vous blesser ou endommager votre peau.
Mise en garde
„ Ne pas installer le projecteur dans des endroits humides ou
poussiéreux, ou dans des endroits où le projecteur peut entrer en
contact avec des fumées grasses ou de la vapeur.
• L’utilisation du projecteur dans de telles conditions pourrait causer un incendie ou des chocs
électriques.
„ Si vous désirez débrancher le cordon d’alimentation, tirer sur la fiche
et non pas sur le cordon directement.
• Le fait de tirer directement sur le cordon d’alimentation risquerait en effet de l’endommager très
rapidement et risquerait de causer un incendie, des courts-circuits ou de graves chocs électriques.
„ Débrancher toujours tous les câbles avant de déplacer le projecteur.
• Le fait de déplacer le projecteur avec des câbles branchés peut endommager les câbles, ce qui pourrait
causer un incendie ou des chocs électriques.
„ Ne pas placer d’objets lourds sur le projecteur.
• Cela peut déséquilibrer le projecteur et le faire tomber, ce qui peut entraîner des dommages ou
des blessures.
„ Ne jamais court-circuiter, chauffer ou démonter la pile ou la jeter
à l’eau ou au feu.
• Le non-respect de cette mise en garde risquerait en effet de provoquer une surchauffe, une fuite, une
explosion ou une mise à feu de la pile, ce qui risquerait de causer des brûlures ou d’autres blessures
graves.
„ Respecter à tout moment la polarité de la pile (+ et –), notamment lors
de son insertion.
• En effet, si la pile n’est pas correctement placée, ceci risquerait de causer une explosion, une fuite,
un incendie, des blessures ou une contamination du compartiment des piles et de ses alentours.
„ N’utiliser que le type de piles spécifié.
• L’utilisation d’un type de pile incorrect pourrait entraîner une explosion, une fuite, un incendie, des
blessures ou une contamination du compartiment des piles et de ses alentours, ce qui, d’une façon
générale, pourrait causer des brûlures ou des dommages matériels.
•
„ Veillez à ce que le faisceau lumineux n’éclaire pas directement votre
peau pendant que vous utilisez le projecteur.
• Une lumière intense est émise par l’objectif du projecteur. Si vous vous placez dans ce faisceau
lumineux, celui-ci risquera de vous blesser ou de vous abîmer la peau.
132 – FRANÇAIS
„ Ne jamais placer les mains ou d’autres objets à proximité des orifices
d’évacuation de l’air.
• De l’air chaud sort est émis par les orifices d’évacuation de l’air. Par conséquent, ne jamais placer
à proximité les mains, le visage ou d’autres parties de votre corps très sensibles à la chaleur.
„ Ne jamais réutiliser une lampe usagée.
• La lampe risquerait en effet d’exploser.
„ Le remplacement de la lampe ne devrait être effectué qu’après lui
„
avoir laissé le temps de se refroidir, car vous risqueriez de vous brûler
sérieusement dans le cas contraire.
Débrancher le cordon d’alimentation de la prise du secteur à titre
préventif avant d’entreprendre tout nettoyage.
• Sinon cela peut causer des chocs électriques.
„ Si la lampe est brisée, aérer la salle immédiatement. Ne pas toucher ou
approcher le visage des morceaux brisés.
• Sinon, l’utilisateur risquera d’inhaler le gaz qui s’est dégagé lorsque la lampe s’est brisée, et qui
contient à peu près la même quantité de mercure que les lampes fluorescentes, et d’être blessé par les
morceaux brisés.
• Si l’on pense avoir inhalé le gaz, ou que le gaz a pénétré dans les yeux ou la bouche, consulter
immédiatement un médecin.
• Demander à son revendeur de remplacer l’unité de lampe et de vérifier l’intérieur du projecteur.
„ Demander à un centre technique agréé de nettoyer l’intérieur du
projecteur au moins une fois par an.
• S’il n’est pas nettoyé et que de la poussière s’accumule à l’intérieur du projecteur, cela peut causer un
incendie ou des problèmes de fonctionnement.
• Il est recommandé de nettoyer l’intérieur du projecteur avant l’arrivée de la saison des pluies. Demander
au centre technique agréé le plus proche de nettoyer le projecteur lorsque cela est requis. Se renseigner
auprès du centre technique agréé pour le coût du nettoyage.
„ Ne pas introduire les doigts dans les ouvertures situées de chaque
„
• Dans le cas contraire, des accidents ou des défaillances risqueraient de se produire.
Information
„
côté de l’objectif pendant les déplacements à l’horizontale ou à la
verticale, car ceci pourrait causer des blessures.
Dans le cadre du respect de l’environnement, ramener toute unité non
réparable à votre revendeur ou société de recyclage.
Ne jamais utiliser le projecteur lorsque les pieds réglables ou l’objectif
de projection sont retirés.
FRANÇAIS – 133
Avant l’utilisation
Accessoires
Vérifier que tous les accessoires ci-dessous sont bien compris avec votre projecteur.
Télécommande
[N2QAYB000076 × 1]
Piles de la
télécommande (AA)
Cordon d’alimentation
Pour 240 V
[K2CG3YY00035 × 1]
Pour 120 V
[K2CH3YY00001 × 1]
Support anti-chutes
Oeillet
[TPAHE86 × 4]
Fil
[TTRA0143 × 4]
Mise en garde concernant les déplacements du projecteur
L’objectif de projection est très sensible aux vibrations et aux impacts. Par conséquent, démonter à chaque fois
l’objectif avant tout transport.
Mises en garde concernant la configuration
Respecter les précautions suivantes pendant toute l’installation du produit.
„ Veillez à installer le couvercle de l’objectif de projection après avoir
installé l’objectif de projection.
Dans le cas contraire, de la poussière risquerait de s’accumuler à l’intérieur du projecteur et de causer des
problèmes.
„ Eviter d’installer cet appareil à un endroit soumis à de fortes vibrations
ou à des impacts violents.
En effet, si le projecteur est installé à un endroit où des vibrations sont transmises à partir d’une source de
puissance ou monté dans une voiture, les vibrations et les impacts pourraient être transmis aux composants
du produit et conduire à des défaillances techniques. Installer donc le produit à un emplacement soumis à
aucun(e) impact ou vibration.
„ Ne jamais installer le projecteur à proximité de lignes haute tension ou de
sources d’alimentation.
L’appareil risquerait en effet d’être exposé à des interférences en cas d’installation à proximité de lignes haute
tension ou de sources d’alimentation.
pas placer le projecteur sur une surface ou tapis en vinyle.
„ Ne
En cas d’aspiration de la surface en vinyle par l’orifice d’aspiration d’air, il y a un risque de blocage de
l’arrivée d’air, ce qui entraînera une hausse de la température interne, suivie d’un déclenchement du circuit de
protection et de l’arrêt du projecteur.
„ Consulter un technicien spécialisé avant toute installation au plafond.
Lorsque l’appareil doit être accroché au plafond, il sera nécessaire d’acheter un accessoire de montage au
plafond (pour plafonds hauts : N°de modèle ET-PKD100H) (pour plafonds bas : N°de modèle ET-PKD100S)
et de contacter un technicien spécialisé pour son installation.
„ Ne jamais utiliser le projecteur à une altitude dépassant les 2 700 m
(8881.5´) au-dessus du niveau de la mer. Pour des utilisations dépassant les
1 400 m (4605.3´) au-dessus du niveau de la mer, configurer le paramètre
“MODE ALTITUDE”, comme décrit à la page 76, sur la valeur “OUI”.
La durée de vie de l’appareil risquerait d’être raccourcie dans le cas contraire.
„ Lors de l’installation et de l’utilisation du projecteur à un angle
supérieur à 30°de l’horizontale en position verticale, régler « SENS
INSTALLATION », décrite page 78, sur « VERTICAL ».
134 – FRANÇAIS
Remarques concernant l’utilisation
voir des images trop claires :
„ •Pour
Votre public aura du mal à voir correctement les images à fort contraste et brillance lorsque de la lumière
naturelle ou en provenance d’une source de lumière interne vient illuminer directement la surface de l’écran.
Par conséquent, tirer les rideaux ou stores des fenêtres, éteindre les sources de lumière proches de l’écran
et prendre d’une manière générale toutes les mesures qui s’imposent.
• Dans certains cas peu fréquents, dépendant avant tout des conditions de projection, il est possible que des
parasites se forment à l’écran en raison de l’air chaud s’échappant du port d’évacuation d’air. S’assurer
qu’aucun appareil capable de recirculer l’air chaud évacué du projecteur en face de celui-ci ou d’un autre
appareil proche.
jamais toucher la surface de l’objectif de projection avec les mains nues.
„ Ne
Toute trace d’empreintes digitales ou tache laissée sur l’objectif sera en effet agrandie par ce dernier et
particulièrement visible sur l’écran pendant les projections. Garder vos mains à distance de l’objectif. Placer
le couvercle sur l’objectif lorsqu’il n’est pas utilisé.
DLP
„ Puces
Les puces DLP sont fabriquées à l’aide d’une technologie de très haute précision. Veuillez noter qu’en de
rares cas, des pixels peuvent manquer ou être toujours allumés, mais il ne s’agit pas d’un dysfonctionnement.
„ Lampe
La source de lumière utilisée dans cet appareil est une lampe au mercure à haute pression interne. Toute
lampe au mercure à haute pression présente les caractéristiques suivantes :
• Elle risque d’exploser en émettant un bruit fort ou de ne plus émettre de lumière à la fin de sa durée de vie,
en raison des impacts reçus, des défauts ou des détériorations subies pendant son utilisation.
• La durée de vie d’une lampe au mercure dépend fortement des conditions d’utilisation auxquelles elle est
soumise. Elles sont tout particulièrement sensibles aux commutations marche/arrêt fréquentes et/ou à
répétitions.
• Dans certains cas très rares, elle risque d’exploser quelque temps après le début de la projection.
• La probabilité d’explosion de la lampe augmente plus elle est utilisée au-delà de sa durée d’utilisation.
• Si la lampe explose, le gaz qui se trouve à l’intérieur s’échappe et peut ressembler à de la fumée.
• Préparer une lampe de remplacement à l’avance.
„ Entretien
S’assurer à chaque fois de bien retirer la fiche du cordon d’alimentation de son logement sur l’appareil avant
tout nettoyage.
• Utiliser un linge propre et sec pour le nettoyage du boîtier.
Utiliser un linge sec imbibé d’eau tiède pour essuyer toute trace d’huile. Ne pas utiliser de solvants tels que
du benzène, un diluant, de l’alcool, des détergents pour cuisine ou un chiffon imbibé de produit chimique.
Le boîtier extérieur pourrait être déformé et la peinture pourrait s’écailler.
• Ne jamais nettoyer la surface de l’objectif avec un linge pelucheux ou poussiéreux.
Toute poussière ayant été déposée sur l’objectif sera en effet agrandie et bien visible à l’écran. N’essuyer la
saleté et la poussière qu’avec un chiffon doux.
MISE EN GARDE:
Lors de la connexion du projecteur à un PC ou à un appareil externe, utiliser le cordon d’alimentation fourni
avec l’appareil correspondant ainsi qu’un câble d’interface blindé disponible dans le commerce.
Mise au rebut
Remarques concernant la sécurité
Si vous utilisez la fonction réseau de ce produit, il existe une possibilité d’être victime des dommages suivants.
• Fuites d’informations personnelles via ce produit
• Utilisation non autorisée de ce produit par une tierce partie malveillante
• Interférence avec ou arrêt de ce produit par une tierce partie
S’assurer que les mesures de sécurité adéquates ont été prises. (p. 88-94)
• Utiliser un mot de passe aussi difficile à deviner que possible.
• Modifier votre mot de passe régulièrement.
• Panasonic et ses entreprises affiliées ne vous demanderaient jamais directement votre mot de passe.
Dans l’éventualité où quelqu’un vous le demanderait directement, ne révélez pas votre mot de passe à cette
personne.
• Utiliser un réseau sur lequel des mesures de sécurité telles qu’un pare-feu ont été mises en œuvre.
• Définir un mot de passe ainsi que des restrictions pour les utilisateurs qui peuvent se connecter.
Information
Lors de la mise au rebut du produit, contacter la municipalité ou le distributeur le plus proche afin de vérifier la
procédure appropriée de mise au rebut.
FRANÇAIS – 135
Remplacement de la lampe
AVERTISSEMENT
•
•
•
•
Attendre que la lampe ait eu le temps de se refroidir avant de la remplacer.
S’assurer que les quatre lampes ont été installées.
Le remplacement de la lampe doit être effectué par un technicien qualifié.
Ne retirez aucune autre vis (comme les vis noires) que celles indiquées pour le remplacement de la
lampe. Dans le cas contraire, vous vous exposez aux décharges électriques, aux brûlures et autres
blessures.
Précautions à prendre lors du remplacement de la lampe
• Faire très attention lors de la manipulation de la lampe. En effet, l’unité de la lampe est soumise à de très fortes
pressions internes. Une mauvaise manipulation risquerait d’entraîner une défaillance.
• Une lampe usée risque même d’exploser en cas de manipulation violente. Contacter un prestataire de services
spécialisé dans le traitement de déchets industriels pour la mise au rebut des lampes usagées.
• La lampe risque d’exploser en cas d’utilisation dépassant la durée de remplacement.
• Un tournevis cruciforme est nécessaire au remplacement de la lampe. Faire attention aux mouvements de la
main lors de l’utilisation du tournevis à proximité de la lampe.
Attention
• L’unité de la lampe est une pièce en option. Consulter votre revendeur pour plus de détails à propos des
commandes.
N°de modèle de l’unité de remplacement de la lampe : ET-LAD12K (ampoule simple),
ET-LAD12KF (4 ampoules)
Puissance : 300 W
• Des lampes autres que celles spécifiées ci-dessus ne devront en aucun cas être utilisées. N’utiliser que les
types de lampe spécifiés.
Intervalle de remplacement de la lampe
Toute lampe utilisée en tant que source de lumière a une durée de vie limitée. La durée de vie de la lampe utilisée
dans ce projecteur est de 2 000 heures. Cependant, il est possible que la lampe soit morte (ne s’allume pas) avant
ces 2 000 heures, selon les caractéristiques de chaque lampe et de ses conditions d’utilisation (la durée de vie
d’une lampe peut en effet être affectée par le nombre de fois où elle a été allumée et éteinte et par les intervalles
qui les séparent). Il est par conséquent fortement conseillé de toujours avoir une ampoule de rechange à portée
de main.
Lorsqu’une lampe n’a pas été remplacée après 2 000 heures d’utilisation, cette lampe sera automatiquement
éteinte. Si la durée d’utilisation de toutes les lampes dépasse les 2 000 heures, le courant sera automatiquement
coupé 10 minutes après le démarrage, et le projecteur passera en mode de veille.
Attention
• Nettoyer et remplacer le filtre à air à chaque remplacement des unités de lampes. (pp. 112-113)
„ Indication après 1 800 heures
Lorsqu’une lampe a été utilisée pendant plus de 1 800 heures, le témoin de la lampe correspondante (LAMP1,
LAMP2, LAMP3 ou LAMP4) s’allumera, même en mode de veille.
De plus, un message s’affichera à l’écran pendant environ 30 secondes comme indiqué sur la figure ci-contre,
demandant un remplacement de la lampe correspondante. (L’indication de la figure ci-dessous disparaît
après environ 30 secondes ou dès qu’on appuie sur une des touches de l’appareil ou de la télécommande.)
Après une durée d’utilisation de 2 000 heures, le message restera affiché en permanence à l’écran, et ne
disparaîtra qu’à condition d’appuyer sur la touche du menu (MENU).
REMPLACER LA LAMPE
136 – FRANÇAIS
Procédure de remplacement de la lampe
1. Couper l’alimentation principale, en suivant les procédures décrites
dans « Mise en marche du projecteur » (p. 38) et « Arrêt du projecteur »
(p. 39), débrancher la fiche du cordon d’alimentation de la source
d’alimentation secteur et attendre une heure ou plus. Ensuite, vérifier la
lampe une fois celle-ci refroidie.
2. Dévisser, à l’aide d’un tournevis
cruciforme (Phillips), la vis du
couvercle de l’unité de la lampe
à l’arrière du projecteur jusqu’à ce
qu’elle puisse tourner librement.
Vis du couvercle de la lampe
3. Ouvrir le couvercle de la lampe
puis retirer cette dernière du
projecteur.
Couvercle de la lampe
4. Dévisser, à l’aide d’un tournevis
cruciforme (Phillips), les trois
vis de fixation de la lampe à
remplacer jusqu’à ce qu’elles
puissent tourner librement. Tout
en tenant doucement l’unité de la
lampe par sa poignée, continuer
à tirer dessus jusqu’à l’extraire
complètement du projecteur.
Vis de
fixation
Poignée
MISE EN GARDE
La lampe ainsi que les pièces se trouvant à
proximité sont toujours extrêmement chaudes
juste après l’utilisation du projecteur.
Vous risquez de très graves brûlures en cas de
non-respect de cette mise en garde.
Unité de lampe 2
Unité de lampe 1
Unité de lampe 4
Unité de lampe 3
5. Installer la nouvelle unité de lampe.
7. Installer puis refermer le couvercle
de la lampe, avant de revisser à
l’aide d’un tournevis cruciforme,
les vis de fixation du couvercle.
Vis du couvercle de la lampe
Mise en garde
• Installer fermement la lampe ainsi que le couvercle
de la lampe. En effet, dans le cas contraire, le circuit
de protection ne fonctionnera pas correctement et
l’appareil ne pourra pas s’allumer.
Information
6. Resserrer à l’aide d’un tournevis cruciforme les 3 vis de fixation de
la lampe pour chaque unité de lampe.
Couvercle de la lampe
FRANÇAIS – 137
Projectors
Panasonic Projector Systems Company
Unit of Panasonic Corporation of North America
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
(201) 392-6591
Technical Support:
PHONE: (888) 411-1996
FAX :
(201) 348-7523
E-Mail : projectorsupport@us.panasonic.com
Panasonic Canada Inc.
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3 (905) 624-5010
© 2008 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
TQBJ 0263-1
S0608-1088B